Report 1

STATE OF QATAR

PRIVATE ENGINEERING OFFICE

Project No. PEO/……..

PROPOSED TRAFFIC & PATROL HEADQUARTERS

TENDER DOCUMENT

VOLUME 2A

AUGUST – 2010

AEB-782-09 REV.00

PROPOSED TRAFFIC & PATROL HEADQUARTERS (B+G+1F)

FOR

PRIVATE ENGINEERING OFFICE AT

MADINAT KHALIFA (SOUTH), DOHA, STATE OF QATAR

PROPOSED TRAFFIC & PATROL HEADQUARTERS FOR PRIVATE ENGINEERING OFFICE

PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME 2 - ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL & STRUCTURAL

VOLUME 2A

AEB-782-09 REV.00

00 Aug. 2010 Construction Issue

REV. DATE ISSUE PARTICULARS

AEB-782-09 REV.00

This specification document is part of overall “Tender Documentation” and is to be read in conjunction with the other parts, including the General Conditions of the Contract, The particular conditions of the Contract, the Drawings, and other Referred Documents of these Specifications. The Tenderer should ensure that they have been fully comprehended and included in the Scope of Works under this Contract.

PROPOSED TRAFFIC AND PATROL HEADQUARTERS

ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL & STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

VOLUME 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

AEB-782-09-REV.00 TOC-1/2

TABLE OF CONTENTS-VOLUIME 2A

Section 1 General Statement and Scope of Work Section 2 Demolition and Alteration (Not Included) Section 3 Ground Investigation Section 4 Piling (Not Included) Section 5 Concrete

1. Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Glass Fiber-Reinforced Concrete (GRC) 3. Bituminous Sheet Substructure Waterproofing System 4. Architectural Precast Concrete

Section 6 Roadworks (Not Included) Section 12 Earthworks Related to Building

1. Site Clearing 2. Earthworks 3. Termite Control

Section 13 Masonry

1. Masonry Unit Assemblies

Section 14 Roofing and Waterproofing

1. Polymer Modified Bituminous Protected Membrane Roofing System 2. Polymer-Modified Cementitious Waterproofing 3. Cold-Applied Rubber-Modified Bituminous Waterproofing 4. Crystalline Waterproofing 5. Bituminous Dampproofing

Section 15 Thermal Insulation to Buildings

1. Building Insulation 2. Fire-Resistive Joint System 3. Penetration Firestopping

Section 16 Structural Steelwork (Not Included) Section 17 Metalworks

1. Metal Fabrication 2. Aluminum Windows 3. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefront 4. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 5. Decorative Metal Railings

PROPOSED TRAFFIC AND PATROL HEADQUARTERS

ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL & STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

VOLUME 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

AEB-782-09-REV.00 TOC-2/2

6. Metal Pipe and Tube Railings 7. Metal-Framed Skylight

Section 18 Carpentry, Joinery and Ironmongery

1. Rough Carpentry 2. Interior Architectural Woodwork 3. Timber Flush Doors 4. Stile and Rail Timber Doors 5. Ironmongery

PROPOSED TRAFFIC AND PATROL HEADQUARTERS ARCHITECTURAL, CIVIL & STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 2 SECTION 1

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-01-1/4 GENERAL STATEMENTS AND SCOPE OF WORK

SECTION 1 GENERAL STATEMENTS AND SCOPE OF WORK The Client, Private Engineering Office, requires the services of a competent and qualified Contractor to carry out the Works for the construction of the Traffic and Patrol Headquarters building in Madinat Khalifa (South), Doha, State of Qatar. Site Location and Description: The Site is within a generally rectangular plot with an approximate total plot area of 57,394 sq. m. and bounded by roads on the north, south, and east, and by a neighbouring plot along its western property limit. Project Summary: The Project, a multi-structure office complex, is mainly comprised of the Headquarters Building, Investigation Building, License Plate Building, and Public Access Buildings (2 nos.); with several ancillary structures, namely; Guardhouse (2 nos.), Genset and Substation (2 nos.), Chiller Yard, and Exterior Staircases. A basement parking level encompassing roughly 85 percent of the plot provides direct access to several areas of the Headquarters building and houses water tanks, ventilation rooms, and sunken gardens which serve as base to 2 interior courts in the building. Interior road network, walkways, soft landscape, and water features comprise the ground-level exterior of the Project. General Scope of Work: The Works shall be as detailed within this Specifications, the Drawings, and other parts of the Contract Document. The Contractor is deemed to have visited the site and to have familiarized himself with the Scope of Work. The Scope of Work, as generally detailed hereunder shall be inclusive of, but not limited to, the following: A. Site Preparation Works

1. Site clearance, reduced level earth and rock excavation of the entire site and the

provision of temporary site perimeter fencing and manned access gates.

2. Identify location of existing underground services within the Worksite boundary that will be affected by the Work and allow for provision of works and responsibilities for diverting thereof.

3. Removal of debris, redundant services and clearing of the Site by grubbing as

necessary and removal of discarded material from the site premises.

4. Removal of shrubs and trees as indicated and general protection of existing site vegetation to be retained, subject to Engineer’s approval.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 1


5. Cut and filling as necessary to bring the sub-grade to required level. The levelled

sub-grade shall be compacted by heavy vibrator roller or other equipments suitable for required application and existing site condition.

6. Backfilling of excavated area with approved-type material in layers not exceeding

250mm in thickness to reach described level, or as indicated.

7. Backfilling of foundation structures shall be by the approved method using approved-type material, as per Section 12 of QCS-2007.

B. Civil/Building Works

1. Excavation to the required foundation level. Dewatering, as necessary, shall be done in site to keep the foundations dry. Filling, if required, shall be carried out using approved material and compacted.

2. Supply and application of approved-type anti-termite treatment, as applicable. 3. Construction of reinforced concrete foundations: raft foundations, isolated footings

or retaining wall, as specified in the Contract Document. 4. Backfilling and compaction of earthwork in building foundations, plinths, and where

necessary, with the approved-type material. 5. Construction of superstructure comprising of R.C. columns, floor slabs, roof slab,

external and external concrete walls, as specified in the Contract Document. 6. Construction of ancillary building structures including, but not limited to, external

masonry walls, internal walls and partitions, as specified in the Contract Document.

7. Waterproofing, insulation and fire protection works, where indicated in the Drawing

or required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHV). 8. Complete supply and installation of roofing works.

9. Installation of ducts/sleeves for services installations including forming and chasing

of openings for conduits, junction boxes. Forming of openings or cutouts in R.C. concrete slabs shall be co-ordinated and carried out during concreting.

10. Grading, and construction of pavements, walkways, water tanks and other hard-

and soft-landscape features, as specified in the Contract Document, in coordination with infrastructure services works.

11. Supply and installation of service and utility equipments as indicated in the

Contract Document.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 1


C. Metalworks, Carpentry, Joinery, Ironmongery, Openings, Glazing and Finishes.

1. Supply and Installation of flooring, skirting, tiling, ceilings, counters, cabinets, fittings and fixtures.

2. Supply and Installation of aluminum windows, glazing, doors, complete with all

related Ironmongery. 3. Supply, surface preparation and application of paint systems of to external and

internal wall and floor surfaces and soffits, as specified in the Contract Document. 4. Supply and installation of all systems and accessories related to the Works.

D. Other building and site development and infrastructure works not specifically mentioned

in the General Scope of Work but indicated in the Drawing or other parts of the Contract Document.

General Specifications Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Works shall be executed in accordance with the latest Government standard publications, specifications, regulations, notices and circulars prevailing prior to the specified Contract Date including, but not limited to the following: A. Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS-2007) issued by the Public Works Authority. B. The regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring Equipment and Air-conditioning of

Residential and Commercial Buildings Fifth Re-issue dated June 1986 issued by the Department of Electricity and Water (KAHRAMAA).

C. The regulations for the construction of Roads and related works.

D. Bristish Standards (BS) and American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Contractor shall comply with codes and standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Document except comply with standards having different revision dates as referenced in the Qatar Construction Specification (QCS-2007) and International Building Code (IBC-2003). In case of any ambiguity or conflict arising in referencing these codes/standards, the more stringent requirement shall be applicable, subject to approval of the Engineer. The omission of any BS, ASTM and other relevant codes from this document does not relieve the Contractor of his compliance therewith. However, the minimum requirements as specified in local regulations shall be fulfilled. Construction Quality Plan Before commencing construction Contractor shall prepare a Construction Quality Plan, which shall identify the key stages of construction, such as the processes to be performed, the inspection & the tests procedures and equipment, the control and verification documents


VOLUME 2 SECTION 1


to be used, the acceptance criteria, and the quality records to be generated. The Construction Quality Plan shall be augmented as necessary by subsidiary plans for individual parts of the Works. All construction processes, including setting out, surveys, manufacture, fabrication, sampling, inspection and testing shall be strictly in accordance with the approved Construction Quality Plan and Procedures.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 3

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-03-00-1/1

SECTION 3 GROUND INVESTIGATION

This Section specifies the requirements and information for the conduct of ground investigation. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Works as indicated herein, including all other incidental works as may be necessary or required for the completion of the project, shall comply with Section 3 and other relevant sections of QCS-2007.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 3

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-03-07-1/1 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

SECTION 3 GROUND INVESTIGATION PART 7 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION 7.1 Summary

A. This Part covers investigation of the existing soil condition and any other sub-

surface investigation works of the Project.

7.2 Description of Work

A. Soil Report Reference: Where available, soil and other ground investigation materials shall be made available by the Engineer to the Contractor for reference and verification purposes. The reports issued are purely for information purpose, without any warranty to its correctness.

B. When so designated, the Contractor shall carry out his own investigation of soil

and other subsurface condition at the Site which, together with other supplemental data as may be required or necessary, shall form part of the final Soil Investigation Report. Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any discrepancy between the ground investigation materials issued by the Engineer and the final Soil Invetigation Report, if any.

C. Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied itself with regard to all ground

condition report materials and any other reference data concerning this Part. Accordingly, Contractor shall include in the Programme of Works and Contract Price all Works necessary for the Project. No claim for additional payment or extension of time shall be considered or admitted arising from Contractor’s failure to do so.

7.3 Contractor’s Responsibility

A. The General Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the sites prior to

submitting his Tender and made all necessary inspections and investigations and to have decided for himself the means of access and working space, the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the presence of existing foundations or other hidden obstructions, the level of the water table, the extent of rock, support to neighbouring properties and structures and all factors affecting the work and shall be deemed to have allowed for these in his Tender. Any information made available to the Contractor, either in these documents or by any other source, will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to decide for himself the nature and extent of the work nor will it guarantee that similar condition will apply on other parts of the Site.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-05-00-1/1

SECTION 5 CONCRETE

This Section includes the requirements for concrete work for structures, water retaining structures, foundations and bases for structures and equipment. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Works as indicated herein, including all other incidental works as may be necessary or required for the completion of the project, shall comply with Section 5 and other relevant sections of QCS-2007.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-05-20-1/28 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

SECTION 5 CONCRETE PART 20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 20.1 GENERAL

20.1.1 Summary

A. This Part specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Foundation Members 2. Slabs-On-Grade 3. Suspended Slabs 4. Columns 5. Beams 6. Concrete toppings 7. Other cast-in-place concrete building members, where indicated in the

Drawing.

B. Unless otherwise noted, specification of materials in this Part shall be taken in conjunction with relevant parts of the Structural Drawing and Section 5 of Qatar Construction Specification (QCS-2007).

20.1.2 Referenced Standards

A. Qatar Construction Specification (QCS-2007)

B. British Standards (BSI)

C. American Standard for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

20.1.3 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project

site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.

E. Samples: For the following: 1. Aggregates 2. Admixtures 3. Curing Materials 4. Reinforcement Materials 5. Other concrete accessories, where specified.

F. Welding certificates. G. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer. H. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency,

indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

I. Material Certificates: For each of the following, where specified in the Project;

signed by the manufacturer:

1. Cementitious Materials 2. Admixtures 3. Form materials and form-release agents 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories 5. Curing compounds 6. Bonding agents 7. Adhesives 8. Vapor retarders 9. Fiber reinforcement 10. Waterstops 11. Joint-filler strips

J. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


20.1.4 Quality Assurance

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is a certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with testing facilities

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the

same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural

Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build panel approximately 18.6 sq. m for slab-on-grade and 9.3 sq. m for

formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.

2. Approved panels may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

H. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements, as indicated in the Contract Documents. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and

examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

20.1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Deliver, store, and handle steel concrete materials, components and accessories according to relevant Parts of Section 5, QCS-2007.

20.2 PRODUCTS

20.2.1 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Specification and other parts of the Contract Document, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

20.2.2 Form Facing Materials: General: To Part 9 Section 9 of QCS-2007, and as

follows:

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with

DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and

edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved

material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist

plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance,

structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 20 by 20 mm. G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form

removal. H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not

bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing

materials. I. Form Ties: To Part 9.3.5 Section 5 of QCS-2007; factory-fabricated, adjustable,

removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Where required, furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls

indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

20.2.3 Steel Reinforcement

A. General: To Part 11.2 Section 5 of QCS-2007, and having the following characteristic strength: 1. For High Yield Bond Steel: 460 N/mm². 2. For Mild Steel Reinforcement: 250 N/mm². 3. Steel Wire Fabric: Of characteristic strength, 485 N/mm².

B. Weldable Reinforcing Steel Bars: To BS 4449.

C. Non-weldable Reinforcing Steel Bars: To QS 1705. D. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars: To ASTM A 775M. E. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: To BS 4483, delivered to Site in flat mats.

F. Tie Wire: Unless otherwise indicated, shall be of 1.6mm black annealed mild

steel complting with BS 4482.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


G. Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a certificate stating the process of manufacture and a test sheet signed by the maker of the reinforcement giving the result of mechanical test applicable to that type of reinforcement. Contractor shall identify the characteristic strength of the reinforcement. The chemical analysis of the reinforcement shall also be provided

H. If required, test specimens from the reinforcement delivered on site shall be

taken by Contractor and sent for testing as directed by the Engineer, and no reinforcement shall be used in the Works until such testing has been carried out and the reinforcement approved.

I. Frequency of sampling and the method of quality control shall be in accordance

with BS 4449. J. Mixing of different types of reinforcement will not be permitted except as

indicated on the drawings. K. Cutting, Bending and Fixing of Reinforcement: Shall be as according to Parts

11.4 and 11.5 Section 5 of QCS-2007. L. Cover to Reinforcement:

1. Unless indicated otherwise in the Drawing, nominal concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as follows: a. Foundation and ground beams (exposed to backfill) 70 mm b. Columns (below ground level-exposed to backfilll) 70 mm c. Columns (above ground level) 40 mm d. Retaining Wall (exposed to backfill) 70mm e. Retaining Wall (water-retaining faces) 60mm f. Ground Beam (not exposed to backfill) 40 mm g. Beams 40mm h. Slabs (With Floor finish and Underlayment) 20mm i. Slabs (Exposed Face) 25mm j. Parapets 30mm

20.2.4 Cement Materials

A. General: To Part 3 Section 5 of QCS-2007; same type, brand, and source of the following cementitious materials shall be used throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: To BS EN 197-1 of ASTM C 150.

a. Pulverized Fuel Ash (Fly Ash): To BS 3892-1 or ASTM C 618. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: To BS EN 15167 or ASTM C

989.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


2. Low-Heat Portland Cement: To BS 1370. 3. Sulphate-Resisting Portland Cement: To BS 4027. 4. Portland Blast-Furnace Slag Cement: To BS EN 197-4 or ASTM C 595, Type

IS. B. Silica Fume: To BS EN 13263 or ASTM C 1240.

20.2.5 Aggregates

A. General: To BS EN 12620 and Part 2 Section 5 of QCS-2007. 1. Shall consist of hard, durable, and uncoated particles containing no material

deleterious to concrete or reinforcing steel, or those likely to cause staining on or disfigure the concrete surface.

2. Limits for physical, chemical, and mechanical properties shall be as specified in Table 2.1, Part 2 Section 5 of QCS-2007.

3. Testing of aggregates shall be according to Table 2.2, Part 2 Section 5 of QCS-2007.

4. The grading and shape of aggregates shall be such that a concrete mix can be produced with the specified proportions and consistency; and which will readily work into position without segregation without the use of excessive water; and which can readily be compacted into a dense impervious mass.

B. Fine Aggregates: As specified in 2.4, Section 5 of QCS-2007.

C. Coarse Aggregate: As specified in 2.5, Section 5 of QCS-2007.

1. When the coarse aggregate is obtained by combining aggregates of different screen sizes, the respective quantities of the various sizes of coarse aggregates shall either be pre-mixed by the supplier at the pit and loaded into vehicles from one hopper for transportation to the batching plant or each respective size shall be loaded from an individual hopper and transported separately to the batching- plant and stored separately until weighted for batching. The method of mixing the respective sizes to obtain the required sizes of coarse aggregate shall be to Engineer’s approval.

D. When tested in accordance with BS EN 12620, the total acid-soluble chloride salt

content for the aggregate shall not exceed the following:

1. Fine Aggregate: 0.06% expressed as chlorination by weight of dry aggregate. 2. Coarse Aggregate: 0.03% expressed as chlorination by weight of dry

aggregate.

E. Storage and Delivery of Aggregates: To Part 2.3, Section 5 of QCS-2007:

1. Washed aggregates shall be kept in storage for at least 24 hours to ensure adequate drainage before being used for concreting.

2. Store on hard paved self-drained areas or in suitable hoppers or containers.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


3. Check by visual inspection each load before tipping and each batch before mixing for consistency of particle shape, accuracy of grading, segregation of particle sizes and cleanliness.

20.2.6 Water: To BS EN 1008 and Part 4 Section 5 of QCS-2007; potable and free from

any deleterious substance.

20.2.7 Admixtures

A. General: To BS EN 480 and Part 5 Section 5 of QCS-2007. 1. Shall be of approved-type and subjected to extensive trial demonstrating

suitability, adequacy of dosing arrangement, and performance. 2. Use of admixture shall be in accordance with admixture Manufacturer’s

written instructions and subject to Engineer’s approval.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: To ASTM C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: To ASTM C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: To ASTM C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: To ASTM C 494, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture:To ASTM C 494,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: To ASTM C 1017M, Type II.

C. Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: To Part 5.6 Section 5 of QCS-2007, and as

follows: 1. Provide commercially-formulated anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and

anodic inhibitor, capable of inhibiting chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494M. Apply in unit quantities specified in the Structural Drawing or as recommended in writing by admixture manufacturer.

D. Color Pigment: To ASTM C 979; synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored

water-reducing admixtures; color stable, non-fading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

20.2.8 Synthetic Fiber Reinforcement

A. Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers, complying with ASTM C 1116 Type III, engineered and designed for the reduction of plastic shrinkage cracking in, and enhancement of, concrete surface; and as follows:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


1. Nominal Length: 12mm. 2. Application Rate: 0.6 kg per cu. m., unless indicated otherwise.

B. Carbon-Steel Fiber: To ASTM A 820; deformed, unless indicated otherwise.

C. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament or fibrillated polypropylene fibers engineered and

designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III. 20.2.9 Waterstops: To Part 12.5 Section 5 of QCS-2007, and as follows:

A. Shall be manufactured from PVC or butyl rubber as recommended for type of

application indicated, and having the minimum physical properties/performance specified in Parts 12.5.2 and 12.5.3, respecitvely of Section 5, QCS-2007. 1. Where indicated or required for critical areas, provide Manufacturer’s

standard water-swelling gaskets having physical properties indicated in Part 12.5.4 Section 5 of QCS-2007.

20.2.10 Curing Materials

A. General: To Part 10 Section 5 of QCS-2007, and as follows: 1. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming,

manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 2. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or

kenaf, weighing approximately 305 g/sq. m when dry. 3. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-

polyethylene sheet. 4. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,

Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 5. Water: To BS EN 1008 and Part 4 Section 5 of QCS-2007; potable and free

from any deleterious substance.

20.2.11 Related Materials

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: To BS 6093.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of

humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.55mm thick galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.85mm

thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

20.2.12 Repair Materials

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product

that can be applied in thicknesses from 3.2 mm and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended

hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,

conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3mm to 6mm or coarse sand as

recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 29 MPa at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 20.2.13 Concrete Mixtures, General

A. Unless indicated otherwise in the Structural Drawing, prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to Table 6.1, Part 6 Section 5 of QCs-2007. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting

proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures, tested according to any of the acceptable testing procedure specified in Part 6 Section 5 of QCS-2007 and agreed between Engineer and Contractor.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials

other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 30 percent to 70 percent, per Part

5.3.1 Section 5 of QCS-2007. 2. Fly Ash: 25 percent to 35 percent, per Part 5.3.2 Section 5 of QCS-2007.

a. Unless indicated otherwise in the Drawing, concrete design mix for all

underground concrete structures, except the following, shall contain fly ash:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


1) Interior columns, beams, and water-retaining and other wet area structures.

3. Silica Fume: Not more than 10 percent, per Part 5.3.3 Section 5 of QCS-

2007. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for

placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high

temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use

industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to

manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

20.2.14 Concrete Mixtures for Building Elements

A. Concrete Strength: Unless otherwise specified in the Structural Drawing, shall be as follows: 1. Blinding Concrete: 20 N/mm² SRC. 2. Structural (Ground and Below): 40 N/mm² OPC Gabbro. 3. Structural (Above Ground): 40 N/mm² OPC Gabbro.

B. Slump Limit: As specified in Part 6.7.2 of QCS-2007; for design slump indicated,

tolerance limit when tested according to BS EN 12350-2 shall be as follows: 1. (-10/+35) for 50mm. 2. (-15/+35) for 75mm. 3. (-20/+40) for 100mm and over.

C. Maximum Free Water-Cement Ratio: For Different Structural Members of the

Building: Unless indicated otherwise in the Structural Drawing, shall be as specified in Table 6.1, Part 6 Section 5 of QCS-2007.

20.2.15 Fabricating Reinforcement: To BS 8110 and Part 11 Section 5 of QCS-2007. 20.2.16 Concrete Batching and Mixing: To Part 7 Section 5 of QCS-2007. 20.3 EXECUTION


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


20.3.1 Transportation

1. General:

1. Transportation delivery and handling shall be in accordance with the

requirements of BS 8500 and BS EN 206-1. 2. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to its place in the Works as

rapidly as possible by methods which will prevent segregation or drying olut and ensure that the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing.

3. Should segregation occur in concrete then the materials shall be remixed to the satisfaction of the engineer or discarded. Furthermore, the cause of the segregation shall be determined and further occurrences prevented.

4. The contractor shall ensure that the time between placing of different lifts or layers of concrete is short enough to prevent formation of cold joints. The Contractor shall ensure that there is a back-up plant that can be used in the event of breakdown, and that adequate provision has been made for the number of delivery trucks.

5. The concrete shall be transported to the site in an approved type of truck mixer or agitator truck which apart from the cab and chassis shall be painted white and kept clean at all times. The discharge chute and other dirty areas shall be washed down after delivery to prevent spillage on the roads.

6. The insides of concrete mix trucks shall be inspected periodically, and any build up of concrete that may impair the efficiency of the mixing action shall be removed.

7. Concrete shall be handled from the place of mixing to its place in the Works within 60 minutes unless retarders heve been incorporated in the mix that have satisfactorily demonstrated that workability and other properties can be retained, and that approval is obtained in writing from the Engineer.

2. Pumped Concrete:

1. Access for the pump shall be checked prior to the pour. If access cannot be

assured, the Contractor shall not continue with concreting operations.

2. If approval is obtained for pumped concrete, the Contractor shall ensure that shock is not transferred from the pipeline to the formwork and previously laid concrete.

3. During placing of concrete by pumping, the end hose must never reach into

the concrete. All measures shall be taken to avoid blockage of the delivery hose system. The compaction of concrete shall be carried out as per standard practice procedures.

4. Grout shall be pumped through the concrete pump to provide initial

lubrication. The initial discharge of any pumped concrete shall not be incorporated in the permanent works,


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


5. Where concrete is conveyed by chuting or pumping, the plant shall be of a size and design to ensure continuous floe in the chute or pipe. The slope of the chute or the pressure of the pump shall allow the concrete to flow without the use of any water additional to that approved by the Engineer to produce the required consistency and without segregation of the ingredients. The delivery end of the chute or pipe shall be thoroughly flushed with water before and after each working period and kept clean. The water used for this purpose shall be discharged outside and away from any permanent works.

3. Records:

1. Within 24 hours of delivery, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with

delivery notes giving the following required information: a. Name of supplier, serial number of ticket and date. b. Truck number. c. Name of Contractor. d. Name of contract and location of office. e. Grade of concrete. f. Specified workability. g. Type and source of cement. h. Source of aggregate. i. Nominal maximum size of aggregate. j. Quantity of each concrete ingredient. k. Type of admixture and quantity. l. Water content. m. Time of loading and departure from ready-mix plant. n. Arrival and departure times of truck. o. Time of completion of discharge. p. Notations to indicate equipment was checked and found to be free of

contaminants prior to batching.

20.3.2 Placing of Concrete

A. General: 1. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the Engineer to his proposed

arrangements before beginning comncreting.

2. All placing and compacting of concrete shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a competent member of the Contractor’s staff with a minimum of Five (5) years of experience in concreting works, and in a manner to produce a watertight concrete of maximum density and strength.

B. For night concreting operations, tha Contractor shall arrange adequate suitable

lighting.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


C. The Contractor shall provide safe secure access for all personnel on concreting operations.

D. Where the thickness of the concrete section exceeeds 600mm the Contractor

shall adopt special precautions, to be approved by the Engineer, to avoid thermal cracking due to external and core temperature differentials.

E. Concrete shall not be place in adverse weather conditions such as dust storms or

heavy rain.

20.3.3 Preparation

A. No concrete shall be place until the Engineer has inspected and approved in writing the surfaces upon which the concrete is to be placed, the formwork, and the reinforcing steel. The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours notice to enable this inspection to be carried out. If concrete is not placed within 24 hours of approval being given, approval shall be obtained again before concreting. An inspection shall be made immediately prior to concreting to check the cleanliness of the forms.

B. Wood forms, unless lined, shall be oiled or wetted with water in advance of placing concrete so that joints will tighten and prevent seepage of cement grout from the mix.

C. The reinforcement shall be sprayed with a small amount of water prior to starting the pour. Reinforcement shall be secured in position, inspected, and accepted by the Engineer before placing the concrete.

D. All inserts, anchor bolts, sleeves and other embedded items shall be accurately located, using templates where appropriate, and held securely to prevent displacement during the placing of the concrete. Aluminum items shall be completely covered and protected when embedded in concrete.

E. Except where shown on the drawings, no fixtures shall be attached to the concrete by shot fixing or drilling without acceptance by the Engineer. Notwithstanding any such authorization, the Contractor shall be responsible forall damage so caused to the concrete and shall make good at his expense.

F. Water shall be removed from the excavations before concrete is deposited. Any flow of water shall be diverted through proper side drains and shall be removed without washing over freshly deposited concrete. All dewatering works shall be continued as long as required. Hardened concrete, debris, and foreign materials shall be removed from interior of forms and from inner surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment.

G. Runways or other means accepted by the Engineer shall be provided for wheeled equipment to convey the concrete to the points of deposit. Equipment used to deposit concrete shall not be wheeled over reinforcement nor shall runways be supported on reinforcements.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


H. Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has set, existing

surfaces shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of laitance, foreign matter and loose particles. Forms shall be re-tightened and existing surfaces slushed with a grout coat of mortar consisting of cement and fine aggregates in the same proportion in the mix, but not leaner than one (1) part cement in two (2) parts fine aggregate, after the exisitng surface has been moistened. New concrete shall be placed before the grout has attained initial set. Horizontal construction joints shall be given a brush coat of grout consisting of cement and fine aggregate I nthe same proportion as concrete to be placed, followed by approximately 75mm of concrete of regular mix, except that the proportion of coarse aggregate shall be reduced to 50 percent.

I. High strength grout for precision support of machine base and soleplates, including equipment subject to thermal movement, tanks, column baseplates, bridge seats, anchor bolts and dowels, etc., shall be a non-shrink, ready-to-use, fluid precision grout material, proportioned, premixed, and packaged at the factory, delivered to the job site to be placed with only the addition of water, formwork, and curing shall be as specified.

20.3.4 Formwork

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete

surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

E. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve

required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


G. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

H. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood,

sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. I. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent

mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. J. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to

manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

20.3.5 Embedded Items

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying

with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 20.3.6 Removal of Formwork

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe removal of the formwork but not

withstanding this, the following table gives the minimum periods, which normally is required between the placing of concrete and the removal of the formwork.

1. Sides of beams, walls, columns, pile caps, rafts etc: 1 Day 2. Slabs soffit formwork (props left under): 4 Days 3. Beam soffit formwork (props left under): 10 Days 4. Removal of props to slabs: 11 Days 5. Removal of props to Beams: 15 Days

B. The above periods may be extended at the discretion of the Engineer for

concrete, which will be subjected to excessive or full working loads within 28 days of placing.

C. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage arising from removal of formwork before the structure is capable of carrying its own weight and any incidental loading.

D. Making Good:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


1. The qualities of finish to the concrete shall be in accordance with the

Standard panel for the particular grade. 2. Any concrete with a finish not in accordance with the Specification or not

equal to the Standard Panel shall be made good by cutting out the defective area and making good with fresh concrete. In thick members, concrete shall be cut back to fully expose reinforcement and the surface shall be prepared in a similar manner to that specified for construction joints before the concrete to make good the surface is placed.

3. The concrete in thin walls and slabs and structural members shall be completely broken out and replaced. Plastering of defective concrete as a means of making good will not be permitted.

4. In the case of minor porosity on the surface, the Engineer may approve a surface treatment by rubbing down with cement and sand mortar mixed in the same proportion to the cement and sand in the concrete. The materials shall be from the same source as those used in the concrete.

5. The treatment shall be carried out as soon as possible after removing the formwork, but not before the surface has been inspected by the Engineer.

20.3.7 Early Loading

A. The Contractor should not that the loading from the falsework and wet concrete,

during the construction of a floor, will not exceed the permissible loading on the floor immediately below. Consequently, two of the floors immediately below the one being constructed will need to be used, to share the loading.

B. While propping through two floors, the Contractor shall ensure that the props

beneath the floor last constructed are released over its full extent as soon as the concrete has achieved sufficient strength to support itself plus any superimposed loading, but not sooner than the periods given in Item 20.3.4.A. The props shall then be re-tightened so that these may be used to share the construction loading from the floor above.

C. Notwithstanding the requirements of this Part for the removal times for formwork,

the following provisions shall apply to early loading of concrete.

1. Concrete shall at no time be subject to loading including its own weight which will induce a compressive stress in excess of 33 percent of the actual compressive strength of concrete at the time of loading or 33 percent of the specified 28-days characteristic strength, whichever is lower. Fot the purpose of this clause, the assessment of the strength of concrete and the stress produced by the loads shall be subject to the agreement of the Engineer.

2. If, due to his method of construction, the Contractor wishes to place an imposed load on the structure, he shall arrange for additional cubes to be cast at the point of structures to be loaded and these cubes will be crushed to monitor the compressive strength in accordance with BS EN 123909-3 compressive strength of test specimens. The Contractor shall submit calculations showing the stresses induced by any proposed temporary loads to be placed on the structure.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


3. No superstructure shall be placed upon finished piers or abutments until the Engineer has given the approval in writing and in no case shall any load be placed until the curing period is complete.

20.3.8 Shores and Re-shores

A. Comply with ACI 318M and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is

complete. B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of

stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete.

Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

20.3.9 Vapor Retarders

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 150 mm and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders

according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill or fine-graded granular

material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 mm or minus 19 mm.

1. Place and compact a 13-mm- thick layer of fine-graded granular material

over granular fill. 20.3.10 Steel Reinforcement

A. General: Comply with BS 8110 and Part 11 Section 5 of QCS-2007 for placing of steel reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor

retarder before placing concrete.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete

surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports

spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with

epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

G. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc

repair material according to ASTM A 780. Use galvanized steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement.

20.3.11 Joints

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement

across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 38 mm into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.

Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and

finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 3.2 mm. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3.2mm wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler

strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with

finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 13 mm or more than 25 mm

below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where

indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

20.3.12 Waterstops

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to

form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.

20.3.13 Concrete Placement

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement

unless approved by Engineer.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such

thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design

pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according

to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw

vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 150 mm into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation,

within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly

worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-

textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with BS 8110. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with Part 15 Section 5 of QCS-2007.

20.3.14 Finishes to Surfaces of Concrete


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


A. Unformed Surfaces: As classified in Part 9 Section 5 of QCS-2007, shall be as follows:

1. U4, Timber Trowel Finish. 2. U3, Steel Trowel Finish 3. U2, Brush Finished. 4. U1, Other finish designated by the Engineer, as follows:

a. Screeded Finish: Where the floor slab is to receive a screeded finish, the

slab shall be laid to the slopes and levels shown on the drawings and the top surface shall be tamped whilst onset, to produce a suitable keyed surface ready to receive appropriate finishing materials.

b. Floated Finish: Where a floated finish is required to the floor slabs tha top surface shall be leveled and floated whilst onset to a uniform a uniform finish to the slopes and levels shown on the drawings. The floating shall be done in such a manner as not to bring an excess of mortar to the surface.

c. Dustproof Finish: Wher concrete surfaces are required to provide a dustproof finish, these shall be treated with two coats of accepted material. Each coat shall be applied with soft brush on a clean and dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

d. Non-Slip Finish: Concrete surfaces indicated on the drawing as havin a non-slip finish shall be treated with carborundum dust, evenly sprinkled whilst concrete is still green, at a rate of 1.5 kg/m² and lightly trowelled in before final finishing. Alternatively, the carborundum dust may be incorporated into the finish by means of a mechanical power float.

e. Hardened Finish: Where a hardened finish is required to the floor slabs, these shall be treated with three coats of accepted materials. Each coat shall be applied with a soft brush on a clean and dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. The type of finish shall be specified on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Before beginning any concrete pour with unformed surfaces, the Contractor shall obtain confirmation of the type of finish required from the Engineer.

C. Initial finishing of unformed surfaces shall commence immediately after the placing and compaction have taken place.

D. Suitable access boards of platforms shall be provided to allow access to all parts of unformed surfaces to be finished.

E. Where a protective treatment or topping layer is to be applied to the concrete, the manufacturer’s and supplier’s recommendations shall be followed concerning the required finish.

F. Brush to finish shall be obtained by carrying out a steel trial finish and then using a suitable stiff nylon dragged lightly across the surface.

G. The addition of small quantities of water to the finishing trowel will be permitted to aid finishing.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


20.3.15 Surface Finish Classification

A. Finishes to formed surfaces of concrete shall be classified as F1. F2, and F3, or

such other special finish as may be designated.

B. Where finish classification is not designated: 1. All internal concrete shall be finished to Class F3. 2. External concrete below ground shall be finished to Class F1. 3. Where surfaces are to be tanked by covering with paint or sheeting, the

formwork shall be capable of achieving a finish suitable for the proposed tanking as directed by the Engineer.

20.3.16 Formwork Materials

A. Formwork for Class F1 finish shall be constructed of timber, or of any suitable

materials which will prevent loss of grout when the concrete is vibrated.

B. Formwork for Class F2 finish shall faced with wrought tongued and grooved boards or plywood arranged in a uniform approved pattern free from defects likely to detract from the appearance of the surface.

C. Formwork for Class 3 finish shall be lined with as large panels as possible of non-staining material with a smooth unblemished surface such as sanded plywood or hard compressed fiberboard, arranged in a uniform approved pattern and fixed to back formwork by oval nails.

20.3.17 Exposed Concrete Surface Finish

A. Exposed concrete surfaces shall have a Class 3 finish.

B. Care shall be taken to ensure that the finish to the exposed concrete on the external and internal surfaces are of the highest quality to produce a smooth concrete surface of uniform texture and appearance without visible imprint of grains, steppings or ridges.

C. The resulting concreting shall be free from honeycombing, stains, fins, lipping,

nail and screw marks, raised grain marks, or any other imperfections,and shall be of a uniform surface texture and color. Only very minor surface blemishes caused by entrapped air or water will be accepted provided that they do not exceed 0.5 percent by area of each square meter considered separately and in addition thay shall not be concentrated in a manner such that they are noticeable.

D. Formwork to the wetted surfaces of water retaining structures shall be Class

F3.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


E. All exposed concrete corners and edges shall have 20 mm by 20mm chamfers.

F. Grooves in exposed concrete shall be formed by attaching tapered planed

timber battens accurately aligned to the face of formwork.

20.3.18 Tolerances

A. The concrete work shall be constructed to an accuracy which shall permit the proper assembly of components and installations and shall be compatible with the finish. The accuracy of the work shall be within the tolerances shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere and, in the absence of any other requirements, shall comply with the following:

1. All laying out dimensions: ±5mm 2. Sections of concrete members: ±5mm 3. Surface of foundations against ground: ±10mm 4. Top surfaces of foundations, bases, and piers: ±20mm 5. Surface level of floor slabs (5m straight slab): ±5mm 6. Surface level of floor slabs to datum: ±10mm 7. Plumb of columns and walls in storey height: ±5mm 8. Plumb of columns and walls in full building height: ±20mm 9. Inside faces of elevator shafts in storey height: ±5mm 10. Inside faces of elevator shafts in full building height: ±10mm

20.3.19 Miscallaneous Concrete Items (As Applicable)

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other smiscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and

foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and

associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.

20.3.20 Concrete Protecting and Curing


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive

cold or hot temperatures. Comply with BS 8110 for cold-weather protection and Part 10 Section 5 of QCS-2007 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 1 kg/sq. m x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,

supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure

unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover

concrete surfaces and edges with 300-mm lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-

retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 300 mm, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces

to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces

to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-

retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray

or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated

in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

20.3.21 Liquid Floor Treatments

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other

contaminants and complete surface repairs. 2. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms;

rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing

compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

20.3.22 Joint Filling

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill

joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints;

leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 50 mm deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

20.3.23 Concrete Surface Repairs


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by

Engineer. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a 1.18-mm sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture

irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids

more than 13 mm in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 25 mm in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Engineer.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and

slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,

popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.25 mm wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface

finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 6 mm to


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 25 mm or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 19-mm clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 25 mm or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using

epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to

Engineer's approval. 20.3.24 Field Quality Control

A. Concrete Test: Quality Testing and sampling of materials and design mixes and frequency of tests shall be performed according to Tables 1.1 and 1.2 in Part 1 Section 5 of QCS-2007.

B. Inspection and Testing of Hardened Concrete shall be according to Part 13

Section 5 of QCS-2007.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-05-21-1/10 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GRC)

SECTION 5 CONCRETE PART 21 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GRC) 21.1 GENERAL 21.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes general requirements for supply and installation of GRC panels and profiles including frames, anchors, and connection hardwares.

21.1.2 Referenced Codes

A. The following relevant codes and standards publications are referenced for the Works specified in this Part: 1. Qatar Constructiuon Specifications 2. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Standards. 3. BS – British Standards. 4. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. 5. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 6. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. 7. PCI MNL-128 - Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete

Panels. 8. PCI MNL-130 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Glass

Fiber Reinforced Concrete Products. 21.1.3 Performance Requirements

A. Structural performance: Provide glass-fiber-reinforced concrete panels and panel frames capable of withstanding gravity, wind, seismic, and erection design loads as well as the effects of thermal and moisture-induced volume changes, according to load factors and combinations established in PCI MNL 128.

B. Design Loads: As indicated.

C. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads with lateral deflections not greater than 1/240 of the wall span.

D. Thermal Movement: Provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 60°C.

E. Design panel frames and connections to accommodate deflections and other

building movements.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


F. Design panel frames to transfer window loads to building structure. 21.1.4 Submittals


B. Design Mixes: For each type of product indicated, as requested by Engineer. C. Shop Drawings: For GRC units, detailing fabrication and installation including the

following: 1. Unit shapes and dimensions. 2. Thickness of facing mix and backing. 3. Joint and connection detail. 4. Lifting and erection detail. 5. Steel support and anchorage system. 6. Size, location and detail of anchors. 7. Relationship to adjacent construction and erection sequence, for special

conditions.

D. Samples: Representative sample for each finished exposed face showing the full range of color and texture specified.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified GRC Manufacturer including current plant

certification issued by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institue (PCI) or by the authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Welding Certificates.


A. Perform Work in accordance with PCI MNL 128, Recommended Practice for Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Panels

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Provide panels and shapes only from a Manufacturer who has demonstrated

capability to produce products of the quality and scope required for this project, and with not less than 5 years of successful experience in manufacturing glass-fiber reinforced concrete panels and shapes and who is certified in one or more of the following programs:

a. Certified Participant in the Architectural Precast Association's Plant

Certification Program for GRC. b. Designated PCI-Certified Plant for Group G, Glass Fiber Reinforced

Concrete by PCI's Plant Certification Program.

2. Manufacturer's responsibility includes fabricating GRC panels and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


responsibility for GRC panels. a. Engineering responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and

comprehensive engineering analysis, based on GRC production test values, by a qualified professional engineer experienced in GRC design.

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm which has specialized in erection of glass-fiber

reinforced concrete panel items similar to those required on this project for not less than 5 years, and acceptable to manufacturer of glass-fiber reinforced concrete panels.

D. Source Limitation: Obtain GRC panels from one source from a single

manufacturer. E. Welder Qualifications: Use welders who have been qualified in accordance with

AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4 within the last year. F. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques

and application workmanship.

1. Finish areas designated by Engineer. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are

approved by Engineer. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

21.1.6 Corrosion Protection

A. As the climate at the project site is particularly corrosive due to its proximity to

the ocean, the resulting saline atmosphere, the high average temperature, and the intense solar radiation, the Contractor shall make all provisions necessary to propose, subject to prior approval by the Engineer, and if approved, to install non-corroding products and materials including aluminum, stainless steel and plastics for materials exposed to the exterior environment. Where specifically indicated or where no alternative to steel or other oxidizing metal is possible, such materials shall be protected against corrosion by protective coating, galvanization, or by other method necessary and guaranteed for not less than 10 years.


A. Deliver units to the project site palletized, safely wrapped, packed and labeled and retain until erected.

B. Store materials in a dry location off the ground, and in such a manner to prevent

damage or intrusion of foreign matter. C. Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in

order to avoid excessive stresses or damage.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


D. Store units to protect them from contact with soil, staining, and from physical damage.

E. Place stored units so that identification marks are easily readable.

21.2 PRODUCTS 21.2.1 Manufacture: Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Specification

and other parts of the Contract Document, refer to Section 30.0 - Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

21.2.2 Materials

A. Aggregates:

1. Back-up Mix: Washed and dried silica sand or other sand having a history of successful use in glass-fiber-reinforced concrete panel construction; passing through a No. 20 sieve.

2. Facing Mix: Fine and course aggregate for face mix shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Aggregates shall be clean, hard, strong, durable, inert, and free of staining and deleterious materials. Provide aggregate in colors and sizes as required to achieve the panel finish texture and colors indicated on the Drawings.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, II or III. Use the same type, brand and

color of portland cement for all panels and shapes. Color shall be as required to obtain the panel facing color indicated.

C. Admixtures:

1. Air-entraining admixtures, ASTM C 260. ASTM C260, ASTM C494, ASTM

C618 or acrylic thermoplastic copolymer dispersion conforming to PCI MNL-130, Appendix E.

2. Polymer Compound: Conform to requirements of PCI MNL-128, Appendix L.

D. Coloring Agent: ASTM C 979; shall have no adverse effects to glass-fiber-reinforced concrete panel set and strength; shall be stable at high temperature; and shall be sunlight fast and alkali-resistant. Color shall be as required to obtain panel facing color selected.

E. Water for Mixing Concrete: Use potable water.

F. Glass Fiber: Conforming to PCI MNL-130 and specifically designed to be

resistant to the aggressive alkaline environment of portland cement-based composites or fibers with a history of successful use in portland cement based composites that has been modified to be compatible with the fiber.

G. Anchors and Loose Attachment Hardware:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


1. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold Drawn Wire: 3. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 325. 4. Pipe: ASTM A 500 Grades A or B. 5. Tube Steel: ASTM A 500 Grade A or B. 6. Carbon-Steel Rods: ASTM A 108, cold drawn. 7. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M. 8. Malleable-Steel Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 9. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A27M, Grade 60-30. 10. Finish: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

H. Form Materials: Provide form materials that will produce panels having the

profile, dimensions and tolerances indicated. Use release agents which are compatible with finish specified and joint sealants proposed for use.

I. Mixes: Portland cement, water, glass fibers and sand mixed in proportions

determined in accordance with PCI MNL-128. 21.2.3 Anchors, Connectors and Miscellaneous Materials

A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: To ASTM A 36/A 36M. Finish steel shapes and

plates less than 4.76mm thick as follows: 1. Finish: Zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M,

after fabrication, or ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable.

B. Carbon-Steel Bars: To ASTM A 108, AISI Grade 1018. Finish steel bars less than 4.76 mm thick as follows: 1. Finish: Zinc coated by [hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M,

after fabrication, or ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable.

C. Malleable-Iron Castings: To ASTM A 47/ A 47M, Grade 22010.

D. Carbon-Steel Castings: To ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 415-205.

E. Bolts: To ASTM F 568M or ASTM A 325M

F. Reglets: PVC extrusions.

21.2.4 Other Materials

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as recommended by the GRC manufacturer as compatible, subject to review and approval by the Engineer.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


21.2.5 Fabrication

A. Fabricate panels in general compliance with PCI MNL-128 and MNL-130. B. Molds:

1. Rigid and constructed of materials that will result in finished products

conforming to the profiles, dimensions and tolerances indicated on the Drawings.

2. Release agents; apply and use according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Proportioning and Mixing:

1. Carefully measure mix constituents in a manner to achieve the desired mix proportions.

2. Meter the glass fiber and cement slurry to the spray head at rates to achieve the desired mix proportion and glass content. Check rates in accordance with standard procedures described in PCI MNL-128.

3. Maintain cleanliness of equipment and working procedures at all times.

D. Hand Spray Application:

1. Spray apply a mist coat consisting of the matrix without fiber. Applied coating not to exceed 3mm thick in order to avoid an unreinforced surface.

2. Spray or place face mix in thickness shown on shop drawings. 3. Spray-up main body of material before the mist coat has set. 4. Apply by spraying such that uniform thickness and distribution of glass fiber

and cement matrix is achieved during the application process. 5. Consolidate by rolling or such other techniques as necessary to achieve

complete encapsulation of fibers and compaction. 6. Control thickness by using a pin gauge or other approved method. Perform a

minimum of 2 measurements per 0.5 square meters of panel surface with at least 3 measurements per panel.

7. Perform hand forming of intricate details, incorporate formers or infill material, and overspray before the material has achieved its initial set so as to insure complete bonding.

E. Inserts and Embedments:

1. Properly embed inserts in built up homogeneous glass-fiber reinforced

concrete panel bosses to develop their strength. Waste material or overspray is not acceptable to encapsulate inserts or for bonding pads.

2. Test inserts to establish test data and reduce test values by the appropriate safety factors to determine connection strength to be used in design.

3. Rigid embedded items bonded to the glass-fiber reinforced concrete panel shall not create undesirable restraint to volume changes.

F. Panel Frame Fabrication:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


1. Fabricate panel frames and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with components securely fastened in accordance with design requirements.

a. Fabricate panel frames using jigs or templates. b. Cut cold-formed metal framing members by sawing or shearing; do not

torch cut. c. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Comply with

AWS D1.3 requirements and procedure for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

d. Fasten framing members of hollow structural sections, steel channels, or steel angles by welding. Comply with AWS DI.I requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

e. Weld flex, gravity, and seismic anchors to panel frames.

2. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies, if necessary, to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies in a manner that prevents damage or significant distortion.

3. Galvanizing Repair: Touch up accessible damaged galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A 780.

4. Fabrication Tolerances: Manufacture panels so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 130 for dimension, position, and tolerances.

G. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Provide in accordance with PCI MNL-

117 and PCI MNL-128.

1. Cover: Provide embedded anchors, inserts, and other sprayed in items with sufficient anchorage and embedment for design requirements.

H. Curing:

1. Immediately after the completion of spraying of the panel, cure panels using a

method to ensure sufficient strength for removing the units from the form. 2. After initial curing, remove panel from form and place in a controlled curing

environment. 3. An acrylic thermoplastic copolymer dispersion may be used as a curing

admixture. Only copolymers shown to eliminate the need for moist curing through independent laboratory test data shall be used.

I. Panel Identification:

1. Mark each glass-fiber reinforced concrete panel to correspond to

identification mark on shop drawings for panel location. 2. Mark each glass-fiber reinforced concrete panel with date on which it was

cast. 3. Apply markings on surface that will not be exposed in the finished

construction.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


21.2.6 Finishes

A. General: Finish exposed-face surfaces of GRC as follows to match approved design reference sample and mockups. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, or other obvious defects.

B. As-Cast-Surface Finish: Provide free of sand streaks, honeycombs, and

excessive air voids, with uniform color and texture. C. Textured-Surface Finish: Impart by form liners to provide surfaces free of sand

streaks, honeycombs, and excessive air voids, with uniform color and texture.

21.2.7 Source Quality Control

A. Quality-Control Testing: Establish and maintain a quality-control program for manufacturing GRC panels according to PCI MNL 130.

1. Test materials and inspect production techniques. 2. Quality-control program shall monitor glass-fiber content, spray rate, unit

weight, product physical properties, anchor pull-off and shear strength, and curing period and conditions.

3. Prepare test specimens and test according to ASTM C 1228, PCI MNL 130, and PCI MNL 128 procedures.

4. Test GRC inserts and anchors according to ASTM C 1230 to validate design values.

5. Produce test boards at a rate not less than one per work shift for each spray machine and for each mix design. a. For each test board, determine glass-fiber content according to ASTM C

1229, and flexural yield and ultimate strength according to ASTM C 947.

B. Acceptability of Appearance:

1. Finished construction in place shall present a uniform, pleasing appearance when viewed in good typical lighting with the naked eye at a distance of 10 feet and shall show no imperfections at a distance of 20 feet.

21.3 EXECUTION 21.3.1 Examination

A. Check placement of structural support system to assure a true and level surface for attachment of panels. Do not begin construction until discrepancies that could adversely affect installation of panels have been corrected.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Engineer of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

21.3.2 Preparation

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the Manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

21.3.3 Erection

A. Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting GRC panels to supporting members and backup materials.

B. Lift GRC panels and install without damage.

C. Install GRC panels level, plumb, square, and in alignment. Provide temporary

supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of panels until permanent connections are completed. 1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width. 2. Remove projecting hoisting devices.

D. Connect GRC panels in position by bolting or welding, or both, as indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after connecting is completed.

E. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3 requirements for welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Protect GRC panels from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and

provide noncombustible shields as required.

F. At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts.

21.3.4 Erection Tolerances

A. Erect GRC panels to comply with the following noncumulative tolerances: 1. Plan Location from Building Grid Datum: Plus or minus 13 mm. 2. Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:

a. Exposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 6 mm. b. Nonexposed Individual Panel: Plus or minus 13 mm. c. Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 6 mm.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


d. Nonexposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 13 mm.

3. Support Elevation from Nominal Elevation: As follows: a. Maximum Low: 13 mm. b. Maximum High: 6 mm.

4. Maximum Plumb Variation over the Lesser of Height of Structure or 30 m: 25 mm.

5. Plumb in Any 3 m of Element Height: 6 mm. 6. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 6 mm. 7. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 6 mm. 8. Face Width of Joint: As follows:

a. Panel Dimension 6 m or Less: Plus or minus 6 mm. b. Panel Dimension More Than 6 m: Plus or minus 8 mm.

9. Differential Bowing, as Erected, between Adjacent Members of Same Design: 6 mm.

21.3.5 Repairs

A. Repairs will be permitted provided structural adequacy of GRC panel and appearance are not impaired, as approved by Engineer.

B. Mix patching materials and repair GRC so cured patches blend with color,

texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces. C. Prepare and repair accessible damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing

repair paint according to ASTM A 780. D. Wire brush, clean, and paint accessible weld areas on prime-painted

components with same type of shop primer. E. Remove and replace damaged GRC panels when repairs do not comply with

requirements. 21.3.6 Cleaning and Protection

A. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to GRC manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Clean soiled GRC surfaces with detergent and water, using soft fiber brushes

and sponges, and rinse with clean water. C. Prevent damage to GRC surfaces and staining of adjacent materials.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-05-22-1/7 BITUMINOUS SHEET SUBSTRUCTURE WATERPROOFING SYSTEM

SECTION 5 CONCRETE PART 22 BITUMINOUS SHEET SUBSTRUCTURE WATERPROOFING

SYSTEM 22.1 GENERAL

22.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes general requirements for materials, tools, equipment and all

services and operations necessary for the complete installation of heavy-duty Bituminous Sheet Substructure Waterproofing of the following:

1. Basement structure. 2. Retaining walls. 3. Water features.

B. This Part supplements Part 14 “Protective Treatments for Concrete” and other

applicable parts in Section 5 of QCS-2007.


A. The minimum standard for products specified in this Section shall include, but not limited to relevant BS and ASTM standards. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform Works in accordance with the latest applicable specification codes, standard publications and other supplements from the approved Manufacturer.

22.1.3 Performance Requirements

A. Material Compatibility: Provide waterproofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by waterproofing membrane Manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

22.1.4 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer’s written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing components.

B. Shop Drawings: For waterproofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details of the system and attachment to other Works.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


C. Samples for verification: For each type of product indicated in manufacturer’s standard sizes unless otherwise indicated. Include mock-up sample of systems indicated.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Manufacturer and Installer. E. Product Test Report: For waterproofing, based on evaluatioon of comprehensive

tests performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Field quality-control report. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Part.


A. Unless otherwise approved or specified by the Engineer, Manufacturer of products in this Part shall be ISO 9001-2000 certified, or higher.

B. Installer Qualification: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized or licensed by waterproofing system Manufacturer to install the products required in this Part and eligible to receive Manufacturer’s special warranty.

C. Source Limitation: Obtain required primary materials through one source from a

single Manufacturer. If required, provide secondary material recommended by Manufacturer of primary material.

D. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with Owner or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative, Installer and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Section, prior to start of installation of waterproofing system. 1. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions and Manufacturer’s

installation and warranty requirements. 2. Notify Owner and Engineer 7 days in advance of date and time of meeting.


A. Deliver waterproofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with Manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a dry, protected

location and within temperature range required by waterproofing membrane Manufacturer. Protect from direct sunlight.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid materials that remained unused within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect waterproofing materials from physical damage and from deterioration by

sunlight, moisture, soiling and other sources. Store in a dry location. D. Handle and store waterproofing material and securely place equipment to avoid

deflection and deformation.

22.1.7 Project Conditions

A. Weather Limitation: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather condition permits in compliance with the system Manufacturer’s written instructions and warranty requirements.

22.1.8 Warranty

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: System Manufacturer’s standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, agreeing to repair or replace primary components of membrane waterproofing system that fail in material within the specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes sheet membrane, protection board and other

primary components of the waterproofing system. 2. Warranty Period: Not less than Ten (10) years from Date of Substantial

Completion.

B. Installer’s Warranty: Warranty signed by Installer covering any and all Works of this Part that failed in workmanship except those that failed due to structural weakness or other cause which are beyond the Installer’s control.

1. Warranty Period: Not less than Ten (10) years from Date of Substantial

Completion.

22.2 PRODUCTS

22.2.1 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Specification and other parts of the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0 – Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

22.2.2 Waterproofing Membrane Assembly: Provide polymer-modified bituminous

sheet waterproofing membrane system comprised of the following components fully compatible for use in the application specified:

A. Modified Bituminous Membrane Sheet: To ASTM D6164, SBS-modified

polymerized bitumen reinforced with non woven spun bond polyester rot-proof fiber, Type II, Grade S and having the ff. minimum requirements:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


Membrane Thickness (±5%) : Not less than 4mm, to ASTM D 751 Reinforcement Base Weight : Not less than 250 g/m² Tensile Strength - Lognitudinal : Not less than 800 N/5cm, to UEAtc Tensile Strength - Transverse : Not less than 700 N/5cm, to UEAtc Tear Resistance - Longitudinal : Not less than 340N, to UEAtc Tear Resistance - Transverse : Not less than 310N, to UEAtc Puncture Resistance - Static : L4, to UEAtc Puncture Resistance - Dynamic : I3, to UEAtc Elongation at Break - Longitudinal : Not less than 50%, to UEAtc Elongation at Break - Transverse : Not less than 55%, to UEAtc Lap Joint Strength - Longitudinal : Not less than 800 N/5cm, to UEAtc Lap Joint Strength - Transverse : Not less than 600 N/5cm, to UEAtc Water Absorption : Not more than 0.2%, to ASTM D 5147 No. of Layers : As indicated in the Structural Drawing B. Primer: Type suitable for application method specified and approved by

waterproofing membrane Manufacturer. C. Sealant: Mastic sealant suitable for application method specified and approved

by waterproofing membrane Manufacturer. D. Protection Board: Provide system manufacturer’s recommedsed multi-layer

thermally bonded bitumen board suitable for below-grade application; shall be weather-, water- and rot-proof; resistant to deleterious materials normally founf in soil and ground water; and with the ff. minimum requirements:

Board Thickness : Not less than 4mm Bitumen Content : 75% Puncture Resistance - Static : L4, not perforated at 25kg in 24 hours, to UEAtc Puncture Resistance - Dynamic : Not less than 1500N/32mm. to ASTM E 154 Chisel Test : Pass Softening Point : Not less than 140°C, ASTM D 36 Water Permeability : Impermeable


A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as recommended by the system Manufacturer as compatible, subject to review and approval by the Engineer.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


22.3 EXECUTION

22.3.1 Examination A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements and conditions affecting performance of waterproofing system:

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

22.3.2 Preparation

A. Clean, prepare and treat substrates according to waterproofing Manufacturer’s

written instructions. B. Remove oil, grease, curing compounds and other penetrating contaminants and

film-forming coatings from concrete. C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate

pockets, holes and other voids. D. Bridge and cover discontinuous slab-to-wall and slab-to-slab joints according to

the waterproofing Manufacturer’s written instructions. E. Prepare, prime and treat outside and inside corner faces of substrate according

to the waterproofing Manufacturer’s written instructions. F. Prepare, treat and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and

penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to the waterproofing Manufacturer’s written instructions.

22.3.3 Installation

A. Install waterproofing membrane system according to Manufacturer’s written

instructions and recommendations.

B. Start installation of membrane in presence of waterproofing system Manufacturer’s technical personnel.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


C. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing waterproofing system.

D. Coordinate installation of waterproofing system so components of the system not

permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

E. Apply primer at the rate recommended by waterproofing Manufacturer. Limit

priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing the same day. Re-prime treated areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

F. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with

requirements; repair substrates and re-apply waterproofing.

22.3.4 Field Quality Control and Inspection A. Site Condition: After completion of the Works, all areas around job site shall be

free of debris, waterproofing materials, equipments and other related items.

B. Notification of Completion: Notify Engineer and Manufacturer in writing indicating completion of the Works.

C. Final Inspection: Arrange waterproofing Manufacturer’s technical personnel to

inspect waterproofing system on completion.

1. Notify Engineer and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

C. Flood Testing for Wet Areas: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completion of waterproofing but before overlying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies and flood with potable water.

1. Flood to an average of 64mm with a minimum depth of 25mm and not

exceeding a depth of 100mm. Maintain 50mm of clearance from top of sheet flashing.

D. Waterproofing system shall be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, shall be performed

to determine compliance of replaced or additional Works with specified requirements.

22.3.5 Protecting and Cleaning

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


B. Protect waterproofing from damage amd wear during remainder of construction

period. C. Protect installed protection board from damage due to UV light, harmful weather

exposures, physical abuse and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately afte installation.

D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction as recommended by

manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-05-23-1/15 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE

SECTION 5 CONCRETE PART 23 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE

23.1 GENERAL

23.1.1 Summary


services and operations necessary for the complete installation of Precast Concrete units where indicated in the Drawing.

B. This Part supplements Part 17 “Structural Precast Concrete” and other applicable

parts in Section 5 of QCS-2007.

23.1.2 Related Sections

A. Section 5.0 – Concrete B. Section 15.0 – Thermal Insulation of Buildings C. Section 24.0 – Finishes to Buildings


A. The minimum standard for products specified in this Section shall include, but not limited to relevant BS and ASTM standards. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform Works in accordance with the latest applicable specification codes, standard publications and other supplements from the approved Manufacturer, including the ff.:

1. ACI 201-2R – Guide to Durable Concrete 2. ACI 224R – Control of Cracking in Consrete Structures 3. ACI 225-R – Guide to the Selection of Hydraulic Cements 4. ACI 301 – Specification for Structural Concrete 5. ACI 302.1R – Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction 6. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 7. ACI 504-R – Guide to Sealing Joints in Concrete Structures 8. IBC – International Building Code (2003)


A. General Performance: This Section is intended to provide performance-type specification for design, fabrication and installation of precast concrete units. Contractor shall be responsible for engineering and detail design of all components including anchorages and support system. Contractor shall propose fabrication methods most suitable to Project requirement provided such


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


fabrication method are in keeping with established and accepted construction practice, will deliver the intended aesthetic result as indicated in the Drawing and meet the requirements specified in this Section, subject to Engineer’s review and approval.

B. Structural Performance: Provide precast concrete units and connections capable

of withstanding all loads imposed during handling and hoisting, and withstanding the design loads within limits and under conditions indicated in Section 5.0 of Qatar Construction Specification.

23.1.5 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each type of concrete mix. C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of precast concrete units.

Indicate member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, cross sections, openings, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement.

1. Indicate welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail loose and

cast-in hardware, inserts, connections and joints including accessories. 2. Indicate separate face and back-up mix locations and thicknesses. 3. Indicate location, extent and treatment of dry joints if two-stage casting is

proposed. 4. Indicate location and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in other

construction.

D. Comprehensive Engineering Analysis certified by a qualified Professional Engineer.

1. Include calculated fire-resistance analysis.

E. Installation Method Statement. F. Calculation Notes: For each of the handling, hoisting and installation process,

and for the final position of the element into the structure.

1. Weight of Element. 2. Position of Centroid. 3. Reactions on lifting hooks. 4. Forces and moments repartition inside the element during hoisting and

installation. 5. Section resistance of element during hoisting and installation. 6. Stability of element against overturning and sliding during installation. 7. Forces and moments repartition inside the element in final position into the

structure. 8. Forces and moments imposed on the structure by the element. 9. Section resistance of precast element and of structure member in final

position into the structure.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


10. Resistance of element-to-structure assemblies. 11. Stability of structure and precast elements against overturning and sliding, at

all stages and on completion. 12. Effects of dilatation and shrinkage. 13. Deflections. 14. Cracking Effects.

G. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of precast

concrete units, in sets of 3, showing quality of finish, color and texture.

1. Sample size: approx. 300mm x 300mm x 50mm.

H. Welding Certificate: Copy of certificates of welding procedures and personnel. I. Material test Report: From a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting

test results of the materials used for compliance with the requirements indicated. J. Material Certificates: Signed by Manufacturers certifying that each of the ff. items

comply with requirements:

1. Concrete Materials 2. Reinforcing Materials 3. Admixtures 4. Water Absorption Test Reports.

K. Field Quality Control Test Reports.


A. Unless otherwise approved or specified by the Engineer, Manufacturer and Installer of products in this Section shall be ISO-9001 certified or higher.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in the manufacture of precast

concrete units and complying with the ff. requirements:

1. Qualified to assume responsibility for engineering precast concrete units to comply with Performance Requirements. Responsibility includes preparation of shop drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified Professioneal Engineer.

2. Professional Engineer Qualification: A Professional Engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services similar to the Project in material, design and extent.

3. Participates in PCI’s Plant Certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant under Group A Category A1.

4. Has sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Works.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


C. Installer Qualification: A firm with a minimum Five (5) years experience in installation/erection of precast concrete units similar to those required for the Project.

D. Testing Agency Qualification: An independent testing agency, acceptable to

Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction and qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329, as documented according yo ASTM E 548.

E. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318M and the design recommendations of

PCI MNL 120, “PCI Design Handbook-Precast and Prestressed Concrete”. F. Quality-Control Standards: For manufacturing procedures and testing

requirements, quality control recommendations, and camber and dimensional tolerances, comply with PCL MNL 116, “Manual for Quality Control for Plant and Production of Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products”.

G. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, “Structural

Welding Code-Steel” and AWS D1.4, “Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel”.

H. Calculated Fire Resistance: Where indicated, provide precast concrete units with

calculated fire resistance complying to ACI 216.1/TMS 0216.1, “Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies”, and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Mockups: Before installing precast concrete units, provide mockups to verify

selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and quality of materials and execution.

1. Build mockup in the location and of the size indicated, or as directed by the

Engineer. 2. Notify Engineer 7 days in advance of date and time of mockup installation. 3. Obtain Engineer’s approval of mockups before starting fabrication. 4. Maintain mockups in undisturbed condition during construction to serve as

standard for judging the completed Work. 5. Approved mockup may become part of completed Work if undisturbed at the

time of Final Acceptance of the Works.

J. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with Owner or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Section, before installation of precast concrete units.

1. Notify Owner and Engineer 7 days in advance of date and time of meeting.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5



A. As the climate at the project site is particularly corrosive due to its proximity to the ocean, the resulting saline atmosphere, the high average temperature, and the intense solar radiation, the Contractor shall make all provisions necessary to propose, subject to prior approval by the Engineer, and if approved, to install non-corroding products and materials including suitable grade aluminum and stainless steel and plastics for materials exposed to the exterior environment. Where specifically indicated or where no alternative to steel or other oxidizing metal is possible, such materials shall be protected against corrosion by protective coating, galvanization, or by other method necessary and guaranteed for not less than 15 years.


A. Deliver precast concrete unit to Project site only at the time of installation or incorporation to finished work. Store precast units raised above grade on heavy wood timber platforms.

B. Protect precast concrete units from dirt, dust, grease, oil, weather and other

staining elements by means of heavy-duty waterproof protective covering. C. Block and laterally brace precast units during transport and while in storage to

prevent bowing and warping. Use clean, non-staining bracing materials that do not prohibit uniform curing of exposed surface.

D. Do not ship precast units to Project site less than 7 days after casting and in no

case until 80% of the specified 28-day curing period has been attained. E. Lift and support precast concrete members during delivery, handling and

installation only with plant-embedded devices located at lifting or support points. F. Identify each unit according to Erection Schedule in area of the panel to be

concealed on installation to finished work. G. Store in such a manner that identification is visible. H. Perform transportation and site handling using acceptable equipment and

method with qualified personnel. I. Handle precast units carefully to avoid breaking, cracking, chipping and staining,

Remove defective and damaged unit from Project site.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


23.2 PRODUCTS


23.2.2 Mold Materials:

A. Mold: Provide molds and, where required, form-facing materials of metal, plastic, wood or other material that is non-reactive with concrete and dimensionally stable to produce continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances and suitable to required finishes.

B. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement and configuration

indicated.

23.2.3 Reinforcing Materials:

A. Comply with Section 5.0 of Qatar Conctruction Specification.

23.2.4 Concrete Materials: Use only approved brand of domestic manufacture; use one brand and type of concrete and from a single source for the entire project.

A. Portland Cement: To ASTM C 150, Type I or III.

1. For facing concrete: use White Portland Cement. 2. For non-exposed backup concrete: use Grey Portland Cement.

B. Aggregates: Normal weight; unless modified by PCI MNL 116, comply with

ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with class designation 5S for coarse aggregates.

1. Face-Mix Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard and durable; free of deleterious

materials that react with cement or cause staining. 2. Face-Mix Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural sand or manufactured sand of

the same material as coarse aggregate.

C. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting and strength of concrete; complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 116.

D. Coloring Admixture: To ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or

colored water-reducing admixture, temperature stable, non-fading and alkali-resistant.

E. Water-Reducing Admixture: To ASTM C 494, Type A.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


F. Retarding Admixture: To ASTM C 494, Type B. G. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: To ASTM C 494, Type D. H. High Range Water-Reducing Admixture: To ASTM C 494, Type F. I. High Range Water-Reducing and Reatarding Admixture: To ASTM C 494, Type

G. J. Plasticizing Admixture: To ASTM C 1017. K. Silica Fume Admixture: To ASTM C 1240. L. For multiple identical precast elements, use cement and aggregate material from

a single source.

23.2.5 Steel Connection Materials

A. Carbon Steel Shapes and Plates: To ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Carbon Steel Headed Studs: To ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AIAI 1020, cold finished; AWS D1.1, Type A or B, with arc shields.

C. Carbon Steel Plate: To ASTM A 283/A 283M. D. Malleable Steel Castings: To ASTM A 47. E. Carbon Steel Castings: To ASTM A 27/A 27M. F. High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel: To ASTM A 572/A 572M G. Carbon Steel Structural Tubing: To ASTM A 500, Grade B. H. Wrought Carbon Steel Bars: To ASTM A 675/A 675M. I. Deformed Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: To ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/A 706M. J. Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs: To ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon steel, hex-head

bolts and studs; carbon steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. K. Finish: For exterior steel items and steel indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc

coating by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M after fabrication, and ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94% zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC-Paint 20.

L. Welding Electrodes: To comply with AWS Standards.

M. Accessories: Provide reglets, clips, hanger and other accessories required to complete installation of precast concrete units.

23.2.6 Stainless Steel Connection Materials (Where Required)

A. Stainless Steel Plate: To ASTM A 666, Type 316, of grade suitable to application.

B. Stainless Steel Bolts and Studs: To ASTM F 593, alloy 316, hex-head bolts and studs; stainless steel nuts; and flat stainless steel washers.

C. Stainless Steel Headed Studs: To ASTM A 276.

23.2.7 Grout Materials

A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, to ASTM C 150, Type I; Clean, natural sand, to ASTM C 144. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2½ parts sand by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

B. Non-Metallic, Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-

staining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application.

C. Epoxy Grout: To ASTM C 881, 2-component resin; of type, grade, and class

suitable to application.

23.2.8 Concrete Mixes

A. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required.

1. Limit use of silica fume not to exceed, in aggregate, 25% of portland cement by weight.

B. Limit water soluble chloride ions in hardened concrete to 0.1% by weight of cement.

C. Limit sulfate ion SO3 content in hardened concrete to 4% by weight of dry

cement.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


D. Normal-weight Concrete: Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on the Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the ff. properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): Prestressed concrete, 40Mpa; Precast

concrete, 30Mpa. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio: 0.4

E. Water Absorption: 12% to 14% by volume, to PCI MNL 117.

F. Other Admixtures: Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, water-reducing and accelerating, or water-reducing and retarding admixtures according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.

G. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Adjustments may be proposed if characteristic of

material, project conditions, weather, test results or other circumstances warrant.

23.2.9 Mold Fabrication

A. Molds: Accurately construct mold, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing operations.

1. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture required.

Provide solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concreting. Coat form liners with form-release agent.

B. Maintain molds to produce precast concrete units in shapes, lines and dimensions required, within fabrication tolerances specified.

1. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.

23.2.10 Fabrication

A. Formwork: Accurately construct forms, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete placement operations and temperature changes. Maintain formwork to produce precast concrete units in shapes, lines and dimensions required, within fabrication tolerances.

1. Coat surfaces of forms with bond-breaking compound before reinforcement is

placed. Provide commercial-formula form coating compounds that will not bond with, stain or damage concrete surface and will not impair bonding or adhesion of subsequent surface treatments. Apply in compliance with Manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles and other Anchorage Hardware:

Fabricate with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware and secure in place during precasting operations. Position anchorage hardware in location where it will not affect main reinforcement and concrete placement.

C. Cast-in reglets, slot, holes and other accessories in precast units to receive

dowels, waterstops, flashings and other similar work as indicated in the Drawing. D. Furnish loose steel plates, clip angles, dowels, cramps, hangers and other

hardware shapes for securing precast units to supporting and adjacent constructions.

E. Cast-in openings larger than 250mm diameter or 250mm square as indicated in

the shop drawing. Smaller holes may be field cut by trades requiring them, subject to approval by Engineer.

F. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in CRSI’s “Manual of Standard

Practice” and PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing and supporting reinforcement.

1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth and other materials that reduce or aversely affect bonding with concrete.

2. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction or concrete placement operation. Locate and support reinforcement with metal chairs, runners, spacers and hangers, as required.

3. Place reinforcement to obtain sufficient support and protection at minimal surface coverage. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Set tie wires so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed surfaces.

4. Install welded wire fabric in the longest possible workable length. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

G. Reinforce precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation and erection

stresses.

H. Mix concrete according to PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.

I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of

weakness due to forming of precast units. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 for measuring, mixing, transporting and placing concrete.

J. Place face mix to a minimum thickness after consolidation of 25mm or 1.5 times

the maximum aggregate size, whichever is greater, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


K. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and other built-in items. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.

L. Comply with ACI 305R recommendations for hot-weather concrete placement. M. Identify pick-up points of precast units and orientation relative to finished

construction with permanent markings, as indicated in shop drawings. Imprint casting date and batch on non-exposed surface of the precast units.

N. Cure concrete according to PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat or

by accelerated heat curing using low pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture.

O. Finish formed surfaces of precast units as indicated for each unit type, and as

follows:

1. Grade A Finish: Fill air pockets and holes larger than 6mm in diameter with sand cement paste matching color of unit. Grind-smooth form offsets or fins larger than 3mm. Float-apply a neat cement-paste coating to exposed surfaces. Rub dried paste coat with burlap to remove loose particles.

P. Discard precast units that are warped, cracked, broken, spalled, stained or

otherwise defective unless approved for repair by the Engineer.

23.2.11 Fabrication Tolerances

A. Product Tolerances: Fabricate precast units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true to plumb, in compliances with PCI MNL 116 product tolerances.

B. Position Tolerances: Provide position tolerances for cast-in items measured from

datum line location, as indicated in shop drawings.

1. Weld Plates: ±25mm 2. Inserts: ±13mm 3. Handling Devices: ±75mm 4. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Fabric: ±6mm, where position has

structural implications or affects concrete cover; otherwise, ±13mm. 5. Reinforcing Steel Extending Out of Member: ±13mm of plan dimension. 6. Location of Rustication Joints: ±3mm 7. Location of Opening within Panel: ±6mm 8. Flashing Reglets: ±6mm 9. Flashing Reglets at Edge of Panel: ±3mm 10. Reglets for Glazing Gaskets: ±3mm 11. Electrical Outlets, Hose Bibbs: ±3mm


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


12. Haunches: ±6mm 13. Allowable Rotation of Plate, Channel Inserts, Electrical Boxes: 2-Degree

rotation or 6mm maximum over the full dimension of the unit.

23.2.12 Erection Tolerances

A. Install precast concrete units level, plumb, square and in alignment without exceeding the non-cumullative erection tolerances as per PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.

23.2.13 Finishes

A. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints shall be unifrom, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of precast concrete units to match Engineer’s approved sample panels or mockups, and as follows:

1. Smooth Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks and

honeycombs, with uniform color and texture.

B. Finish all exposed surfaces of precast units to match face surface finish.

C. Finish unexposed surfaces of precast units by float finish.


A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements.

B. Strength of precast units shall be considered deficient if units fail to comply with ACI 318M for concrete strength.

C. Testing: If there is evidence that the strength of precast units may be deficient or

may not comply with ACI 318M requirements, Contractor shall employ an independent testing agency to obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine comprehensive strength according to ASTM C 42M.

1. A minimum of three cores samples will be taken from units of suspect

strength, from locations selected by Engineer. 2. Core samples will be tested in an air-dry condition per ACI 301 if units will be

dry under service condition. 3. Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores will be considered satisfactory

if the average compressive strength is equal to at least 85% of the 28-day design compressive strength and no single core is less than 75% of the 28-day compressive strength design requirement.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


4. Test results will be made in writing on the same day that tests are performed, with copies to Engineer, Contractor and precast concrete Fabricator. Test report shall include the ff.: a. Project Identification Name and Number b. Date when tests were performed c. Name of precast concrete fabricator d. Name of concrete testing agency e. Identification letter, name and type of precast concrete unit or units

represented by core tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at break, corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.

5. Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast units comply with

requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mix that has no coarse aggregate, with finish matching adjacent precast concrete surface.

6. Dimensional Tolerances: Units with dimension smaller or larger than required and not complying with tolerance limits may be subject to additional testing.

a. Precast units with dimension larger than required will be rejected if the

appearance or function of the structure is adversely affected or if larger dimension interfere with other construction. Repair or remove and replace rejected units, as required, to comply with costruction condition.

D. Defective Work: Precast units that do not comply with requirements including

strength, tolerances and finish are unacceptable. Replace with precast concrete units that comply with requirements.

23.3 EXECUTION

23.3.1 Examination

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Do not install precast concrete units until supporting concrete has attained

minimum design compressive strength.

23.3.2 Installation A. Install precast concrete units. Shore and brace precast units to maintain location,

stability and alignment until permanent connections are installed.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


B. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability

and alignment of precast units as permanent connections are being installed.

1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses.

2. Remove projecting hoisting devices and use sand-cement grout to fill void within recessed hoisting devices flush with surface of concrete.

C. Anchor precast units in position by bolting, welding, grouting or as otherwise

indicated. Remove temporary shims, wedges and spacers as soon as possible after anchoring and grouting are completed.

D. Welding: Perform welding in compliance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4, by

qualified welders.

1. Protect precast units and bearing pads from damage by field welding or cutting operations and provide non-combustible shields as required.

2. Repair damaged metal surfaces by cleaning and applying a coat of galvanized repair paint on galvanized surfaces.

E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or power-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to precast or prestressed concrete units unless approved by Engineer.

F. At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent

loosening of nuts. G. Erection Tolerances: Install precast units level, plumb, square and true, without

exceeding the recommended erection tolerances in PCI MNL 127, “Recommended Practice for Erection of Precast Concrete”.

H. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain

grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, thumping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finish or hardens.

23.3.3 Field Quality Control

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and

inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to visual inspections and non-destructive testing

according to ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 5


C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and

Engineer.

D. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, shall be performed to determine compliance of corrected Works to requirements.

23.3.4 Repairs

A. Repair exposed exterior surfaces of precast units to match color and texture and

maintain uniformity with adjacent units, subject to approval by Engineer.

B. Remove and replace damaged precast units if repairs do not comply with requirements.

1. Contractor shall place clear markings on rejected units for identification and

removal from Project site.

23.3.5 Cleaning A. Clean exposed surfaces of precast units after erection to remove weld marks or

other markings, dirt and stains.

1. Wash and rinse according to Fabricator’s written instructions. Protect other work from stain or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or procedure that could change color or texture of exposed concrete surfaces.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-12-00-1/1

SECTION 12 EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDING

This Section specifies the requirements for excavation and filling as necessary to facilitate the construction of the Works. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Works as indicated herein, including all other incidental works as may be necessary or required for the completion of the project, shall comply with Section 12 and other relevant sections of QCS-2007.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-12-06-1/6 SITE CLEARING

SECTION 12 EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDING PART 6 SITE CLEARING 6.1 GENERAL

6.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes the following:

1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass to remain. 2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and, grass as

indicated in the drawings and instructed by the Engineer. 3. Clearing and grubbing 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements 6. Disconnecting, capping or scaling, and abandoning site utilities in place and

removing site utilities 7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

6.1.2 Definitions

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles, friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 25 mm in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other non soil materials.

B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be

protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

D. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary

flow of pore water.

E. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top

surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

G. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well

as underground services within buildings.

6.1.3 Submittals


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and

plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings, identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other

subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions

C. Workshop drawings including plan of complete site showing any relocation of existing underground services of required.

6.1.4 Site Conference

A. Pre-installation Conference: The Engineer to conduct conference at Project site

to comply with Project requirements

6.1.5 Material Ownership

A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Client's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used

facilities without permission from Client and/or authorities having jurisdiction 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required

by authorities having jurisdiction

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Client's property shall be obtained by Client and/or authorities having jurisdiction before award of Contract 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by the

Engineer.

C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Client's premises where indicated.

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and

sedimentation control measures are in place.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


6.2 PRODUCTS

6.2.1 Soil Materials

A. General: Refer as specified in Part “Earthwork’, of this Specification.

6.3 EXECUTION

6.3.1 Preparation

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Client.

D. Examine related work and surfaces before starting the work of this Part. Report

to the Engineer in writing, conditions, which will prevent the proper provision of this work. Beginning the work of this Section without reporting unsuitable conditions to the Engineer shall constitute acceptance of conditions by the Contractor. Any required removal, repair, or replacement of the work caused by unsuitable conditions shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.

6.3.2 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control

A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during

construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

6.3.3 Tree Protection

A. No Trees shall be removed, or relocated (on site and/or off site) without the specific written approval of the concerned local authority.

B. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection zones before

starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area.

2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash

C. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated D. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones,

hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are

permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 40 mm in diameter with emulsified asphalt

or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible

E. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Engineer.

1. Employ an arborist, approved by the Engineer, to submit details of proposed

repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as

determined by Engineer

6.3.4 Utilities

A. Client will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding

with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Client will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Client or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

6.3.5 Clearing and Grubbing

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to

be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and

careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.

3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth indicated in the drawings below exposed subgrade

4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 5. Chip removed tree branches and stockpile in areas approved by Engineer

dispose of off-site or as otherwise indicated in the documents

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 200 mm,

and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground

6.3.6 Topsoil Stripping

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials

1. Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris,

weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 1800 mm. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for re-spreading deeper topsoil.

6.3.7 Site Improvements

A. Remove existing above-and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


1. Unless the existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly

saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion.

6.3.8 Disposal

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off the Client's property.

1. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other non-

recyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-12-07-1/15 EARTHWORKS

SECTION 12 EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDING PART 7 EARTHWORKS 7.1 GENERAL

7.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes general requirements for materials, tools, equipment and all services and operations necessary for earthwork including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Preparing sub-grades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns and

grasses and exterior plants. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage Course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks and pavements. 5. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical

utilities and pits for buried utility structures. 7. Grading to level as per grading plans. 8. Disposal of surplus and waste materials.

7.1.2 Definitions

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including

haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Course placed between the sub-base course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before

laying pipe

D. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below sub-base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

E. Sub-base Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions in Bills of Quantities.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 3 m in width and more than 9 m in length.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades

H. Rock: Rock material in beds. ledges, un-stratified masses, conglomerate

deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed (0.75 cu. m) for bulk excavation or (0.50 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by normal rock excavating equipment, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted

I. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface

J. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings

K. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

L. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.

7.1.3 Submittals

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 2. Geotextile 3. Geofoam 4. Each type of plastic warning tape.

B. Samples: For the following:

1. 14-kg samples sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed soil material from on-site or borrow sources.

2. Water for soil compaction: 1.5 litres. 3. Geotextile: 300 x 300mm

C. Workshop drawings including plan of complete site showing any relocation of

existing underground services of required.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil

material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to BS 1377-4:1990 for each on-site

and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

E. Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.


A. Blasting: Use of explosives is not permitted.

B. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329/BS 7502:19X9 EN 45002:1989 to conduct soil material's and rock- definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740/BS 6460-:19H3 and ASTM E 548.

C. Pre-excavation Conference: The Engineer to conduct “kick-off” conference at Project site to comply with requirements and coordination of Site Works


A. Nature of Excavation:

1. Include for excavating in any type of ground encountered. 2. Include for breaking up rock materials, materials so firmly cemented as to

possess the characteristics of rock, concrete or masonry structures, or any other hard or compacted materials encountered in excavations, all at the Contractor's cost.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Client or

others unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before

excavating.

C. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with Utility Authorities having jurisdiction to shut off services if lines are active.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


7.1.6 Storage

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees

7.2 PRODUCTS

7.2.1 Soil Materials

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

1. To be free from plastic fines and weakly cemented lumps of sand. 2. To be homogeneous and at the optimum moisture content for compaction

purposes when placed. 3. Any slopes required will be as shown on drawings. 4. Water: Water used for compacting fill shall be clean and free from oil,

grease, organic matter, suspended fine sediment and other deleterious substances.

B. Satisfactory Soils: As per ASTM D 2487 includes soil classification groups GW,

GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: As per ASTM D 2487 includes soil classification groups GC,

SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Sub-base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed

gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 40 mm sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a 0.075 mm sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,

crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; BS 5835-1:1980 or ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 40-mm sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a 0.075 mm sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; BS 5835-1:1980 or ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 40 mm sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a 0.075 mm sieve.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed

gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; BS 5835-1:1980 or ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 25 mm sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a 0.075 mm sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; BS 63-1:1987 or ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 40-mm sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a 2.5 mm sieve.

I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed

stone and natural sand; ASTM D448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 25 mm sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a 5 mm sieve

J. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.

K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

7.2.2 Geotextiles

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Non-woven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; and complying with AASHTO M 288 including survivability (Class 2).

B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50 percent; and complying with AASHTO M 288 including survivability (Class 2).

7.2.3 Controlled Low Strength Material

A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Low-density, self-compacting, flowable concrete material as follows: 1. Portland Cement: BS 12 / ASTM C 150. Type I and II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. 3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: BS 882 / BS 1201 (20 mm) nominal maximum

aggregate size. 4. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869. 5. Water: BS 3148. 6. Air-Entraining Admixture: BS 5075

B. Produce low-density, controlled low-strength material as per approved manufacturer’s recommendations and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

7.2.4 Accessories


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 150 mm wide and 0.1 mm thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 750 mm deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

7.3 EXECUTION

7.3.1 Preparation

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Make provision for all temporary work, scaffolding, staging, timbering, strutting

and other works as may be necessary and required for the proper, safe and efficient performance and construction of the works intended and all works incidental thereto in an expeditious manner to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. Be responsible for any damage done to roads, mains, cables, including safety to persons and property, by the execution of the work.

D. The cost of furnishing, placing and removing the temporary works shall be

included in the Tender for the work. E. Examine related work and surfaces before starting the work of this Part. Report

to the Engineer in writing, conditions, which will prevent the proper provision of this work. Beginning the work of this Section without reporting unsuitable conditions to the Engineer shall constitute acceptance of conditions by the Contractor. Any required removal, repair, or replacement of the work caused by unsuitable conditions shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.

7.3.2 Dewatering (Where Required)

A. Design, supply, installation and maintenance of the entire dewatering system on

site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared sub-grades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


C. Protect sub-grades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water

to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

2. Provide standby pumps to ensure continuous dewatering operations will be provided and these should number at least 50% of the main pumps.

3. Keep sub-grades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

7.3.3 Excavation, General

A. Generally:

1. Excavate to the depths and profiles shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

2. Allow sufficient working space where necessary for the erection of earthwork support system.

3. Notify the Engineer of any unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area, until notified to resume work.

B. Where an excavation encroaches below a line drawn at an angle of 60° from the

horizontal from the nearest formation level of another higher excavation, the lower excavation, all work within it, and backfilling thereto shall be completed before the higher excavation is made.

C. Excavated Formations:

1. In made up ground excavate foundations down to a natural bearing formation

of undisturbed subsoil, unless otherwise instructed. 2. Obtain instructions if a natural bearing formation of undisturbed subsoil:

a. Is obtained at a lesser depth than that shown on the Soils Report. b. Is not obtained at the depth shown on the Soils Report.

3. If, after inspection, formation becomes unsuitable for any reason, excavate

further and backfill with approved material all at the Contractor's expense.

D. Treatment of Formations: General:

1. Trim excavations to required profiles and levels. 2. Remove all loose material.

E. The removal of any temporary work will be carried out following the Completion

of the main work and shall not be part of this contract.

7.3.4 Excavation for Structures


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 25 mm. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of

excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 25 mm. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

7.3.5 Excavation for Walks and Pavement

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections,

elevations, and sub-grades.

7.3.6 Excavation for Utility Trenches

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each

side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 300 mm higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance 300 mm each side of pipe or conduit unless indicated otherwise in

the drawings.

C. Trench Bottoms Without Bedding Course: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape sub-grade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench sub-grade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 150 mm in nominal diameter and Hat-

bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed sub-grade.

2. For pipes and conduit 150 mm or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. Excavate trenches 150 mm deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


D. Trench Bottoms With Bedding Course: Excavate trenches 100 mm deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 150 mm deeper than elevation required in rock or other

unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

7.3.7 Subgrade Inspection

A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required sub-grade. B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation

and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Proof-roll sub-grade below the building foundation or footing, slabs, walkways

and pavements with suitable heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof- roll wet or saturated sub-grades

1. Completely proof-roll sub-grade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in

direction perpendicular to first direction when so directed by the Engineer. Limit vehicle speed to 5 km/h.

2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 13.6 tons, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Where approved by Engineer, authorized additional excavation and replacement

material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices or changes in the Work.

E. Unauthorized Excavation: Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of (17.5 MPa), may be used when approved by Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as

directed by Engineer.

7.3.8 Backfill

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, sub-drainage,

dampproofng, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


4. Removal of concrete formwork. 5. Removal of trash and debris. 6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installation of permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally

supported walls.

B. Place backfill on sub-grades free of mud.

7.3.9 Utility Trench Backfill

A. Place backfill on sub-grades free of mud, debris and other untended foreign material.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 450 mm of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.

D. Provide minimum 150 mm thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 1000 mm below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 150 mm of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway sub-base. Provide one mesh of reinforcement T10@100 E.W. in concrete thickness.

E. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 25 mm in any dimension, to a height of 300 mm over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up

on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength

material to a height of 300 mm over the utility pipe or conduit.

G. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.

H. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final sub-grade elevation.

I. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final sub-grade elevation.

J. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 300 mm below finished grade, except 150 mm below sub-grade under pavements and slabs.

7.3.10 Soil Fill


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


A. Plow, scanty, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use Engineered Fill or Controlled Low-

Strength Material as directed by the Engineer without additional cost.

C. Place soil fill on sub-grades free of mud.

7.3.11 Soil Moisture Control

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate sub-grade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material

that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

7.3.12 Compaction of Soil Backfills and Fills

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 200 mm in loose depth

for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 100 mm in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to BS 1377-4:1990: 1. Under building footings, slab-on-grade, steps, and service pavements, scarify

and recompact top 300 mm of existing sub-grade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent, or as mentioned on the drawings, whichever is greater.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 150 mm below sub-grade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent, or as mentioned on the drawings, whichever is greater.

3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 150 mm below sub-grade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.

7.3.13 Grading


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface

changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new

grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required

surface tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 25 mm. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 25 mm. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 13 mm.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 13 mm when tested with a 3m straightedge.

7.3.14 Subsurface Drainage

A. Sub-surface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of sub-drainage trench. Place a 150 mm course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support sub-drainage pipe. Encase sub-drainage pipe in a minimum of 300 mm of filter material, placed in compacted layers 150 mm thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 150 mm. 1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight

according to BS 1377-4:1990. B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in

width indicated, to within 300 mm of final subgrade, in compacted layers 150 mm thick. Overlay drainage backfill with 1 layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 150 mm. 1. Compact each filler material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight

according to BS 1377-4:1990.

7.3.15 Sub-base and Base Courses

A. Place sub-base and base course on subgrades free of mud, debris and other untended foreign material.

B. On prepared subgrade, place sub-base and base course under pavements and

walks as follows:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


1. Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place base course material over sub-base course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.

3. Shape sub-base and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.

4. Place sub-base and base course 150 mm or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

5. Place sub-base and base course that exceeds 150 mm in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 150 mm thick or less than 75 mm thick.

6. Compact sub-base and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to BS 1377-4:1990.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of sub-base and base course

to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 300 mm wide, unless shown otherwise in the drawings, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each sub-base and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to BS 1377- 4:1990.

7.3.16 Drainage Course

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, debris and other untended foreign material.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place

concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Install sub-drainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 150 mm or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

3. Place drainage course that exceeds 150 mm in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 150 mm thick or less than 75 mm thick.

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to BS 1377-4:1990.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency, and approved by the Engineer, to perform field quality-control testing, if provisions for facilities for such testing is not required to be provided at the project site in the Contract.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will

be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing sub-grades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Engineer.

D. Testing Agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922. and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Building and Paved Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and

backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 100 sq. m or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests.

2. oundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 30 m or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 50 m or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved

degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

7.3.18 Protection

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or

partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by the

Engineer; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Defects Liability Period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match

adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.

7.3.19 Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Client's property.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Client's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Engineer.

1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and

legally dispose of it off Client's property

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-12-08-1/4 TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 12 EARTHWORKS RELATED TO BUILDING PART 8 TERMITE CONTROL 8.1 GENERAL

8.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes materials, tools, equipment, and all operations and services necessary for the supply and application of termite control system.

8.1.2 Definition

A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency.

B. PCO: Pest Control Operator.

8.1.3 Submittal

A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-Registered Label.

1. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products

certifying that treatments furnished comply with requirements. 2. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is

completed, submit report for record information, including the following as applicable:

a. Date and time of application. b. Moisture content of soil before application. c. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. d. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. e. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. f. Area of application.

B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of Local Authorities to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where the Project is located and, who is experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


C. Source Limitation: Obtain termite control products from a single source and

manufacturer.

8.1.5 Project Condition

A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.

8.1.6 Warranty

A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

1. Warranty Period: Not less than Three (3) years from date of Substantial

Completion.

8.2 PRODUCTS

8.2.1 Soil Treatment

A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product’s EPA-Registered Label.

1. Preferred Product: Termidor by BASF Corp., Agricultural Products; or

approved equal.


A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation exposed aggregate render, subject to review and approval by the Engineer.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


8.3 EXECUTION

8.3.1 Examination

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

8.3.2 Preparation

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer.

1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow

preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

8.3.3 Application, General

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.

8.3.4 Applying Soil Treatment

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency.

Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly.

1. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of

foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footings, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter, form grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 12


2. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated.

Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.

3. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab

construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.

4. Masonry: Treat voids. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will

be penetrated.

8.3.5 Cleaning and Protection

A. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

B. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

C. Post warning signs in areas of application.

D. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-13-00-1/1

SECTION 13 MASONRY

This Section specifies the products, erection and all associated accessories for the construction of concrete and clay masonry unit blockwork as well as requirements glass block units, gypsum units and stoneworks. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Works as indicated herein, including all other incidental works as may be necessary or required for the completion of the project, shall comply with Section 13 and other relevant sections of QCS-2007.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-13-06-1/17 MASONRY UNIT ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 13 MASONRY PART 6 MASONRY UNIT ASSEMBLIES 6.1 GENERAL 6.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes general requirements for the supply and installation of the following types of masonry units and other related materials, accessories and services necessary to complete the Works: 1. Concrete Masonry Unit, Hollow and Solid Block. 2. Clay Masonry Unit. 3. Pre-Insulated Masonry Unit.

6.1.2 Related Works

A. Section 5.0 – Concrete B. Section 15.0 – Thermal Insulation of Buildings




A. Provide unit masonry that achieves the 28-day minimum compressive strength requirement upon shipment to the Project site, as determined according to BS 6073: Part 1 or ASTM C 90.

6.1.5 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the ff.:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing and location of special shapes. 2. Joint Reinforcement: Detail corners, tee intersections, reinforcement at

control and expansion joints, and other special wall conditions. 3. Reinforcing Detail: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing

bars.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


4. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples: Submit 3 samples for each type of masonry units and accessories, before delivery to the Project site.

1. Identify all samples with project name, date, Contractor’s name,

Manufacturer’s name, and product name and type. 2. Approved samples shall be retained in site for use as acceptance standard

until completion of Works.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” article.

E. Material Cetificates: Signed by Manufacturers; certifying that each item indicated

complies with requirements:

1. Masonry Units: Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

2. Include size-variation data verifying the actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances.

3. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type and weight at time of delivery.

4. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

5. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. 6. Each type and size for joint reinforcement. 7. Each type and size of anchor, tie and metal accessory.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as indicated otherwise:

1. International Building Code (IBC-2003) 2. Qatar Construction Specification (QCS-2007) 3. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures (ACI 530-02) 4. SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” for flashing standards.

B. Testing Agency Qualification: An independent testing agency, acceptable to local

authorities having jurisdiction, and qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

C. Source Limitation for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform

texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, by a single Manufacturer from a single source, for each product required.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


D. Source Limitation for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one Manufacturer for each cementitious component, and from a single source or producer for each aggregate.

E. Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, obtain products from Manufacturers

that employ a quality management system complying with ISO-9001 or higher.


A. Store masonry units on elevated platform in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, securely tie and cover with heavy-duty, waterproof sheeting. If unit becomes wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry

location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be

maintained; avoid contamination. D. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for

use with dispensing silos. Store containers on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location.

E. Store masonry accessories including metal items in an enclosed and dry location

to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projection and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day’s work. Cover partially completed masonry work when construction is not in progress.

B. Do not apply uniform or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads

for at least 3 days after building masonry wall or column. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar and soil from staining, or immediatel

remove those that come in contact, with the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted.

1. Protect base of wall from water or mortar splatter by spread covering with

waterproof sheet.

6.2 PRODUCT


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


6.2.1 Manufacturer: Subject to full compliance with the requirements of this Specification and other parts of the Contract Document, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

6.2.2 Masonry Units, General:

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standard may allow a certain percentage of units to contain defect within stated standard limits. Masonry units to be exposed in the completed Works however, shall be free from cracks, splits, spalls, chippages and other such defects.

B. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where indicated or required, provide masonry units that

comply with requirements for fire resistance rating, as determined according to ASTM E 119, by testing specimen units having equivalent masonry thickness per ASTM C-140, or by other means acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated in the Drawing.

C. Tolerances: Dimension of masonry units in any direction (length, height and

thickness) shall not vary from nominal size by more than 3mm.

6.2.3 Concrete Masonry Units: To BS 6073: Part 1 or ASTM C 90.

A. Compressive Strength:

1. Average Compressive Strength of 10 Blocks: Not less than 7.5 MPa, with minimum individual unit compressive strength of 6.5 MPa. a. Where load-bearing walls are indicated, provide with minimum average

compressive strength of 12.5 MPa for every 10 blocks, with minimum individual unit compressive strength of 10.0 MPa.

2. For Floor Slabs (Hourdi Blocks): Provide units with minimum average

compressive strength of 4.0 MPa for every 10 blocks, with minimum individual unit compressive strength of 3.5 MPa.

B. Density Classification: Normal Weight.

C. Size: Length=400mm x Height=200mm, or as indicated in the Drawing. D. Exposed Face: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by the

Engineer’s sample.

6.2.4 Clay Block Masonry Units: To BS EN 771-1 and BS 3921; Clay blocks masonry units shall be of uniform size and shape, and shall have serrated outer surface for increased bonding force with mortar. Units to be exposed in the


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


completed Works shall be free from cracks, splits, spalls chippages and other defects.

A. Unit Compressive Strength: To Table 4.2, Part 4 Section 13 of QCS-2007; shall

not be less than 7.5 MPa for minimum average of masonry assembly, with minimum individual unit compressive strength of 6.0 MPa.

B. Size: Length=400mm x Height=200mm, or as indicated in the Drawing. C. Dimensional Tolerance: As indicated in Table 4.2, Part 4 Section 13 of QCS-

2007. D. Water Absorption: Shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of individual block and

20 percent by average weight of tested blocks, when tested according to BS EN 772-7.

6.2.5 Pre-Insulated Masonry Units: Provide Pre-Insulated Masonry Units complying

with the compressive and flexural strength requireme of the latest applicable ASTM and BS standards, subject to Engineer’s approval.

A. Proposed product shall have the ff. minimum requirements:

Size : 400L x 200H x Thickness as indicated in the Drawing Compressive Strength : 7.5 MPa, or More U-Value : 0.5 W/m²K, or Less Insulation, Material : Molded Polystyrene Insulation, Density : 24 Kg/m³, or More Insulation, Thickness : 60mm, or More

6.2.6 Mortar and Grout Materials

A. Portland Cement: To ASTM C 150, Type II; provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: To ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Cement: To ASTM C 1329. D. Masonry Cement: TO ASTM C 91. E. Mortar Pigments: To ASTM C 979.

1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weigh for mineral oxide; 2 percent for black carbon.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


2. Pigments shall exceed 2 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.

F. Pigmented Mortar for Bricks: Use a colored cement or cement-lime formulation as required to produce color matching the brick units.

G. Aggregate for Masonry Mortar: To ASTM C 144, except for joints less than

6.5mm, where aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the 1.8mm sieve shall be used.

1. For exposed masonry works, use washed aggregate conssisting of natural

sand or crushed stone. 2. White Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone. 3. Colored Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite

or other colored stone with color matching brick units.

H. Aggregate for Masonry Grout: To ASTM C 404.

I. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: To ASTM c 395; where indicated, color to match approved mockup.

J. Water-repellant Admixture: Liquid water-repellant mortar admixture intended for

use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellant by the same Manufacturer.

K. Water: Potable, clean and free of deleterious chemical.

6.2.7 Insulation Materials

A. Insulation, Pre-Insulated Masonry Unit: To ASTM C 578; Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene resin bead or granule in a closed mold specially shaped for installing in cores of pre-insulated masonry unit.

B. Insulation, Cavity Wall: Where indicated:

1. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: To ASTM C 578, Type IV or X, closed-cell with integral skin and minimum density of 30 kg/cum.

2. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation board Manufacturer for application indicated.

6.2.8 Steel Reinforcement

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: To ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 420.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


B. Joint Reinforcement, General: To ASTM A 951/A 951M. Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following at every 3 courses:

1. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: Coating class as follows:

a. For interior walls: To ASTM A 641/A641 M, Class 1. b. For exterior walls: To ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B2.

2. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side

rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 3 meters, with prefabricated corner and tee units, complying with requirements indicated below: a. Wire diameter for side rods: 3.8mm. b. Wire diameter for cross rods: 3.8mm.

C. For single-wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:

1. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 407mm O.C.

D. For multie-wythe masonry, provide type as follows:

1. Ladder-type with perpindicular cross rods spaced not more than 407mm O.C. and 1 side rod for each face shell of masonry units.

E. Wall stabilization details shall be as indicated in the Drawing.

6.2.9 Ties and Anchors

A. Fishtail Ties:

1. For concrete masonry units, furnish hot-dip galvanized steel fishtail ties 250mm x 50mm x 2mm, at junction with concrete walls and columns, at 400mm O.C. vertically and with beams and slabs at 600mm O.C. horizontally.

2. For cavity walls, furnish hot-dip galvanized steel ties as detailed on drawings. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide ties within 300mm of openings and spaced not more than 900mm apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties spaced not more than 600mm O.C. vertically.

B. Rigid Anchors:

1. General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


a. As indicated in the Drawing. b. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

C. Adjustable Anchor for Connecting to Steel Frame: (As Applicable)

1. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical and horizontal

adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendiculat to plane of wall. a. Anchor Section: Crimped 6.4mm diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire

anchor section for welding to steel. b. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 25mm of

masonry face, made from 6.4mm diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel.

D. Miscellaneous Anchors: 1. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolt per ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with hex nuts

to ASTM A 563M and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: a. Headed bolts. b. Non-headed bolts, bent in manner indicated.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Where indicated or required, provide anchors as

described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, loads imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Type: Expansion anchors. 2. For interior location, provide materials made of carbon steel components

zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn, unless otherwise indicated.

3. For exterior location or where indicated, provide materials made of alloy Group A1 or A4 stainless steel bolts to ASTM F 738M, and nuts to ASTM F 836M.

4. Safety Factor for Post-Installed Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed.

6.2.10 Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories

A. Compressible Filler: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1, 35% compressible, formulated from Neoprene, Urethane or PVC.

B. Pre-formed Control Joint Gaskets: To be selected, as formulated from the

following:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


1. PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287. 2. Styrene-butadiene-rubber compond, complying with ASTM D 2000.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with

ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcement bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 4.8mm steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

1. Provide two- or four-loop as required to suit number of bars indicated.

E. Sealants: Approved-type as indicated in Section “Joint Sealants”.

F. Embedded Flashing Materials:

1. Rubberized Asphalt Sheet Flashing: Wall flashing compound, 0.8mm thick, bonded completely and integrally to high-density, cross-laminated polyehtylene film, 0.2mm to produce an overall thickness of 1.0mm.

2. Primer: Approved-type primer as recommended by flashing Manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to masonry and concrete.

3. Adhesive: Approved-type adhesive as recommended by flashing Manufacturer for use indicated.


A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of masonry assemblies, subject to review and approval by the Engineer.

6.2.12 Mortar and Grout Mixes

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments,air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellants, or other admixtures, unless indicated otherwise.

1. Do not use calcium chloride.

B. Pre-blended Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a

preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients befor delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270; provide the following types of

mortar, unless indicated otherwise:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For exterior above grade, load bearing or non-load bearing walls and parapet

walls; for interior load bearing walls; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S.

4. For interior non-load bearing partitions, use Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Where required, select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored concrete products. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement weight. 2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by

weight. 3. Mix to match Engineer’s approved sample.

E. Colored Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored

aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1. Mix to match Engineer’s approved sample.

F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or

coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 255mm to 280mm as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer’s written instructions.


A. Contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing agency, at Employer’s expense, to perform source quality-control testing indicated below:

1. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at

Contractor’s expense.

B. Concrete Masonry Unit tests: For each type of unit indicated; testing to comply with ASTM C 140.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13



A. Examine conditions, with Installer, present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Prepare written report, endoresed by Installer, listing existing conditions detrimental to performance.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Before installation, examine roughing-in and built-in construction to verify

actual locations of piping connections.


6.3.2 Installation, General

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to

the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units having width indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses required to accommodate itams specified in this

Section and in other part of the Contract Document. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed befor completing masonry. After

installing equipment, complete masonry with units matching construction adjacent to opening. Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saw to dry before placing, unless otherwise specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and

humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.

1. Where ambient temperature exceeds 35 deg. C, or 32 deg. C with a wind

velocity greater than 13km/h, do not spread mortar beds more than 1200mm ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.

6.3.3 Construction Tolerances

A. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 6mm in 6 meters, with the maximum line thickness of 12mm.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


B. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 6mm in 3 meters.

C. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and

reveals, do not vary from level by more than 6mm in 6 meters, with the maximum line thickness of 12mm.

D. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than 3mm,

plus or minus, with the maximum line thickness of 12mm. Do not vsry from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 3mm.

E. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than

3mm, plus or minus. Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 3mm.

6.3.4 Laying Masonry Walls

A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with

uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using units cut less than half its original size, particularly at corners and jambs.

B. Units shall be laid in running (stretcher) bond with vertivcal vertical joints in

successive courses centering on midpoint of the unit below. Joints to be dead level and uniform in width.

C. Bond pattern for exposed masonry: Lay exposed masonry in running (stretcher)

bond, unless indicated otherwise in the Drawing. D. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with

less than 100mm horizontal face dimension at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for

one-half running bond, or one-third-unit on one-third running bond; do not tooth courses. Clean exposed masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.

F. Buit-in Works: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and

other Sections. Solid-fill masonry units around location of built-in items. G. Where buit-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place

a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless

indicated otherwise. I. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 600mm under bearing

plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless indicate otherwise.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


J. Build non-load bearing interior partitions in full height of storey to underside of

solid floor or roof structure, above, unless indicated otherwise.

1. Install compressive filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above.

2. Wedge non-load bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above attains final position.

3. At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above, as specified in Section , “Fire-Resistive Joint System”.

6.3.5 Mortar Bedding and Jointing

A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows:

1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells; with head joints of equal depth to bed joints.

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters.

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

6.3.6 Anchoring Masonry to Structural Members

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural

members to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space of not less than 25mm wide between masonry and structural member, unless indicated otherwise. Keep open space free of mortar or any rigid material.

2. Anchor masonry to structural member with galvanized steel fishtail anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 610mm O.C. vertically and not more than 915mm O.C. horizontally.

6.3.7 Control and Expansion Joints

A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where needed.

Build-in related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

1. Fit bond breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces.

2. Install preformed control joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond breaker strips

at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint. 4. Install temporary foam plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit

masonry is complete.

C. Form expansion joint in brick masonry as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 100mm

in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any.

2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers, where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less

than 13mm for installation of sealant and backer rod.

6.3.8 Grouting

A. Use fine grouts for filling spaces less than 100mm in both horizontal and vertical directions.

B. Use coarse grout for filling spaces 100mm or larger in both horizontal and vertical

directions. C. Prior to grouting, clean and inspect grout spaces and close cleanout holes.

Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcement and adjust to proper position as required. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After all final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes and brace closures as required to resist grout pressures.

D. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained

sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shoes and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations.

E. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not

more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place pour in lifts not exceeding 1.2 meters in height. Allow not less than 30 minutes or not more than 1 hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


F. When more than 1 hour is required to complete a given section of masonry,

extend reinforcing beyond as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 37mm of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units to and place reinforcing for second pour section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pour is required.

6.3.9 Lintels

A. Provide lintel where shown and where opening of openings of more than 305mm

for brick-size units and 610mm for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

6.3.10 Flashing

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles,

lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Unless indicated otherwise, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing Manufacturer.

2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 100mm into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 100mm at ends and turn flashing up not less than 50mm to form a pan.

3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer, up face of sheathing at leacst 200mm, and behind air-infiltration barrier or building paper.

4. Extend sheet metal flashing 13mm beyond face of masonry at exterior and turn flashing down to form a drip.

5. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 13mm back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge.

6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 13mm back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


6.3.11 Reinforced Masonry Installation

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make it

sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar ang grout. Brace, tie and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.


A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of

site-prepared mortar. 2. lace grout only after verification by Inspectors for compliance of grout spaces

and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared

grout.

B. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 500 sq. m of wall area or portion thereof.

D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67

for compressive strength. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM

C 140 for compressive strength. F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided,

according to ASTM C 780.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 13


G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM

C 1019.

6.3.13 Repairing, Pointing and Cleaning

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; applyl fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate any indication of replacement.

B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes,

and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, smooth, solid, watertight, compacted joint.

1. Prepare joints for sealant application where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean masonry unit as work progresses by dry brushing to

remove mortar fins and smear before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-

metallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel

uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Engineer’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clean water.

5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method applicable to type of stain on exposed suface as per Manufacturer’s written instructions.

6.3.14 Masonry Waste Disposal

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Project site.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-14-00-1/1

SECTION 14 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING

This Section specifies general requirements for various types of roof covering and waterproofing materials and accessories. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Works as indicated herein, including all other incidental works as may be necessary or required for the completion of the project, shall comply with Section 14 and other relevant sections of QCS-2007.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-14-06-1/10 POLYMER MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM

SECTION 14 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING PART 6 POLYMER MODIFIED BITUMINOUS PROTECTED MEMBRANE

ROOFING SYSTEM 6.1 GENERAL

6.1.1 Summary


services and operations necessary for the complete installation of polymer modified bituminous membrane roofing system, comprised of, but not limited to, the following components:

1. Polymer Modified Bituminous Membrane Sheet 2. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation 3. Aggregate Ballast 4. Concrete Pavers 5. Other ancillary roofing components, as indicated in the Drawing.

B. This Part supplements Part 2 “Membrane Roofing” and other applicable parts in

Section 14 of QCS-2007.


A. Section 9.0 – Mechanical and Electrical Equipment

B. Section 15.0 – Thermal Insulation of Building

C. Section 18.0 – Rough Carpentry

D. Section 24.0 – Finishes to Buildings 6.1.3 Referenced Standards



A. General Performance: Installed roofing membrane and base flashing shall remain watertight and withstand thermally induced movements and exposure to weather without failure due to material, fabrication, installation and other


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


construction defects. Membrane roofing and base flashing shall withstand uplift pressure as specified:

1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 3.1 kN/m² 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 3.1 kN/m² 3. Fields-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 1.4 kN/m²

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one

another under conditions of service and application required, as evidenced by membrane roofing Manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

6.1.5 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. An up-to-date copy of the Manufacturer’s literature shall be made available on site prior to and during application of the Works of this Part.

B. Shop Drawings: For roof waterproofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of the system and attachment to other Works.

C. Samples for verification: For each type of product indicated. Include mock-up sample of systems indicated.

D. Installer’s Certificate: Signed by system Manufacturer certifying that Installer is duly approved and authorized by Manufacturer to install waterproofing system.

E. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Signed by system Manufacturer certifying that proposed system complies with the requirements of the Project.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and Manufacturer.

G. Product Test Reports: Evaluation based on comprehensive tests performed by Manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of waterproofing system.

H. Maintenanca Data: For waterproofing system, to include maintenance manuals.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

J. Inspection Report: On completed waterproofing system installation, prepared and signed by Manufacturer of waterproofing system.


A. Installer Qualification: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized or licensed by membrane roofing system Manufacturer to install the products required in this Part and eligible to receive Manufacturer’s special warranty.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


B. Manufacturer’s Qualification: A qualified firm that is ISO-9001 certified or higher and experienced in the manufacturing of roofing system required in this Part.

C. Source Limitation: Obtain required primary materials through one source from a

single Manufacturer. If required, provide secondary material recommended by Manufacturer of primary material.

D. Fire Resistance Rating: Where indicated or required, provide fire-resistance rated roof assemblies identical to those assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

E. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with

Owner or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative, Installer and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Part, prior to start of installation of roof system.

1. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions and Manufacturer’s


6.1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling Assurance

A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with Manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a dry, protected location and within temperature range required by roof system Manufacturer. Protect from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid materials that remained unused within

it’s stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation Manufacturer’s written instructions for handling, storing and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing material and securely place equipment to avoid

deflection and deformation.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14



A. Weather Limitation: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather condition permits in compliance with the system Manufacturer’s written instructions and warranty requirements.

6.1.9 Warranty

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace primary components of membrane roofing system that fail in material within the specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes sheet membrane, flashing, accessories and other

primary components of the membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: Not less than Ten (10) years from Date of Substantial

Completion.

B. Installer’s Warranty: Warranty signed by Installer covering any and all Works of this Section that failed in workmanship except those that failed due to structural weakness or other cause which are beyond the Installer’s control.

1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from Date of Substantial Completion.

6.2 PRODUCTS

6.2.1 Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements of this Specification

and other parts of the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0 – Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

6.2.2 Waterproofing Membrane Assembly: Where indicated or required, provide

SBS (Styrene Butadiene Styrene) modified bituminous roof membrane system comprised of the ff. components fully compatible for use in the application specified:

A. Base Sheet Material: To ASTM D4601, SBS-modified, asphalt-impregnated and

coated sheet, with glass-fiber reinforcing mat, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.

1. Weight: 1.2 kg/m², minimum.

B. Modified Bituminous Membrane Sheet: To ASTM D6164, SBS-modified

polymerized bitumen reinforced with non woven spun bond polyester rot-proof fiber, Type II, Grade S and having the ff. minimum requirements:

Membrane Thickness (±5%) : Not less than 4mm, to ASTM D751


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


Reinforcement Base Weight : Not less than 180 g/m² Tensile Strength - Lognitudinal : Not less than 800 N/5cm, to UEAtc Tensile Strength - Transverse : Not less than 600 N/5cm, to UEAtc Tear Resistance - Longitudinal : Not less than 180N, to UEAtc Tear Resistance - Transverse : Not less than 200N, to UEAtc Puncture Resistance - Static : L4, to UEAtc Puncture Resistance - Dynamic : I3, to UEAtc Elongation at Break - Longitudinal : Not less than 40%, to UEAtc Elongation at Break - Transverse : Not less than 50%, to UEAtc Lap Joint Strength - Longitudinal : Not less than 800 N/5cm, to UEAtc Lap Joint Strength - Transverse : Not less than 600 N/5cm, to UEAtc Water Absorption : Not more than 0.2%, to ASTM D 5147 No. of Layers : As indicated in the Drawing C. Cap Sheet: To ASTM D6164, SBS-modified, polyester fiber reinforced, Type II,

Grade S; suitable for application method specified.

D. Base Flashing Sheet Material: To ASTM D6164, SBS-modified, polyester fiber reinforced, Type II, Grade S; suitable for application method specified.

E. Asphalt: Roofing Asphalt, to ASTM D312, type III or IV as recommended by roof membrane Manufacturer for application.

F. Primer: Asphalt Primer, to ASTM D41; suitable for application method specified.

G. Sealant: Moisture-curing, non-slump elastomeric sealant suitable for roofing applications. The sealant shall be approved by roof membrane Manufacturer for use in conjunction with the specified roof membrane material.

6.2.3 Protection Materials

A. Separator Sheet: Polyethylene sheet, 0.1mm thick, minimum.

B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: To ASTM C 578, Non-absorbent, extruded, closed cell polystyrene board specifically manufactured for use as roof insulation, and having the following minimum requirements:

1. Density: To ASTM D 1622; 32-35 kg/cu.m., minimum. 2. Compressive Strength: To ASTM 1621; 300 kPa, minimum. 3. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent by weight, maximum. 4. Maximum Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: To ASTM E 84; 5 and 165,

respectively. 5. Face Size: 600 x 1200mm, minimum.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


6. Thickness: As indicated in the Drawing. 7. Edges: Square, except for drainage channels.

C. Roof Paver (Where Applicable): Provide heavyweight, hydraulically-pressed, square-edged, factory-cast concrete paver where indicated in the Drawing, and having th following minimum requirements: 1. Size: 400 x 400 mm, or as indicated in Drawing. 2. Nominal Thickness: 50 mm. 3. Water Absorption: Not more than 5%, to ASTM C140. 4. Compressive Strength: 45 MPa min., to ASTM C140. 5. Area of Application: Where indicated to form roof walkways or at roof

perimeters, corners, and penetration areas.

D. Aggregate Ballast (Where Applicable): Provide river rock with nominal size of 13mm up to a maximum of 25mm, with no sharp edges where indicated in the Drawing; to ASTM D 448. 1. Thickness of Aggregate Layer: Not less than 50mm. 2. Provide filter fabric; non-woven polypropylene, water permeable and resistant

to UV degradation, of type and weight recommended by roofing system manufacturer for the application indicated.

6.2.4 Screed: Refer as specified in Section 24 – Cement Based Screed, of this

Specification.



6.3 EXECUTION

6.3.1 Examination

A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements and conditions affecting performance of roof membrane system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, set and braced and

roof drains securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs and nailers are securely anchored to

roof deck at penetrations and terminations. 3. Verify that minimum concrete curing period recommended by roof systen

Manufacturer has passed.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


4. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263.

5. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing system components to substrate have been removed.


6.3.2 Preparation

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture and other substances detrimental to

installation of roof membrane system. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and

from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof drain plug when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer according to roof system

Manufacturer’s written instruction and allow to dry.

6.3.3 Installation, General A. Install roofing membrane system according to Manufacturer’s written instructions

and recommendations. B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system

Manufacturer’s technical personnel. C. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform

services for installing roofing system. D. Coordinate installation of roofing system so components of the system not

permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at the end of each day’s work to cover exposed roofing

membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing aspahalt with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoinig roofing.

E. Asphalt Heating: Heat and apply roofing asphalt according to roofing system Manufacturers written instructions.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


F. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints and building openings or damaging other roofing system components and adjacent building works.

6.3.4 Base Sheet Installation

A. Install lapped base sheet course according to roofing system Manufacturer’s

written instruction, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants.

6.3.5 Modified Bituminous Membrane Installation A. Install sheet membrane by torch application according to roofing system

Manufacturer’s written instruction, starting at low point of roofing system. B. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and

maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.

1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.

C. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water.

6.3.6 Flashing and Stripping Installation

A. Install base flashing cover over cant strips and other sloping and vertical

surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system Manufacturer’s written instructions and as follows:

1. Prime substrate with asphalt primer if required by roofing system

Manufacturer. 2. Torch apply flashing sheet to substrate.

B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets to aminimum of 200mm above roofing

membrane and 100mm onto field of roofing membrane.

1. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing.

C. Install roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on membrane roofing according to roofing system Manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Where required, apply coating to base flashings according Manufacturer’s written

instruction, by spray, roller or other suitable application method.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


6.3.7 Insulation Installation A. Loosely lay polyethylene separator sheet over cooled roofing membrane, with a

minimum of 150mm side and end laps. B. Loosely lay board insulation units over roofing membrane, with long joints in

continuous, straight lines and with end joints staggered between rows. Abut edges and ends between units.

C. Cut and fit board units to fit within 19mm of projections and penetrations.

6.3.8 Concrete Paver Installation A. Install pavers over roofed area according to insulation and paver Manufacturer’s

written instructions. B. Where indicated in the Drawing, install pavers on pedestal sets according to

pedestal Manufacturer’s written instructions.

6.3.9 Field Quality Control and Inspection A. Site Condition: After completion of the Works, all areas around job site shall be

free of debris, waterproofing materials, equipments and other related items. B. Notification of Completion: Notify Engineer and Manufacturer in writing indicating

completion of the Works. C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system Manufacturer’s technical

personnel to inspect roofing system on completion. 1. Notify Engineer and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of

inspection.

D. Roofing system shall be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, shall be performed

to determine compliance of replaced or additional Works with specified requirements.


A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction

period. When remaining construction works do not affect roofing system, inspect for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report to Engineer and Owner.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


B. Correct deficiencies in or remove components or parts of roofing system that do not comply with requirements, repair substrates and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion and according to warranty requirements.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-14-07-1/6 POLYMER-MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING

SECTION 14 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING PART 7 POLYMER-MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING 7.1 GENERAL 7.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes the general requirements necessary for, and incidental to, the complete supply and installation of positive-side and negative-side surface waterproofing of the following:

1. Water Features. 2. Other tiled-surface, water-retaining or water-excluding concrete structures,

where indicated in the Drawing

7.1.2 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, and installation instructions for polymer-modified cementitious waterproofing.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for

substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C. Samples: For type of polymer-modified cementitious waterproofing indicated.

1. Include Samples of available color selection, where specified. D. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and Applicator.

E. Product Certificates: For waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials, from

manufacturer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Field quality-control reports. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualification: Engage a Manufacturer that is 9001:2000 certified or one that employs an equivalent or higher system of quality management; with


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


a minimum of Ten (10) years documented experience in manufacture/fabrication of product required for this Project; and capable of providing field service representation during installation.

B. Applicator’s Qualification: Engage a highly-experienced Applicator trained, authorized and certified in writing by the Manufacturer for the installation of their product, having a record of successful in-service performance in previous Projects, and eligible to receive manufacturer’s special warranty.

C. Source Limitation: Obtain ptimary waterproofing materials through one source

from a single Manufacturer. If required, provide secondary material recommended by manufacturer of primary material.

D. Mockups: Provide mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical vertical and horizontal surfaces 0.9 sq. m in size. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Engineer specifically approves such deviations in writing.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate

condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.


A. Deliver materials to site undamaged and in sealed original containers with label indicating:

1. Manufacturer’s name and trademark. 2. Manufacture and expiry date of material. 3. Method of application and mixing with other components of the system.

B. Store materials in a dry area away from direct sunlight, within range of

temperature recommended by Manufacturer. 7.1.5 Project Condition

A. Weather Limitation: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather condition permit according to Manufacturer’s written inctructionss.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


B. Proceed with waterproofing works only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains, and other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed. Proceed only after substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks have been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials.

C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application. Maintain ventilation

until waterproofing has cured. 7.1.6 Warranty

A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which

Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace material that does not comply with requirements or fails to perform accordingly, within the specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate

prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1.6 mm in width.

2. Warranty Period: Not less than Ten (10) years from date of Substantial completion.

7.2 PRODUCT 7.2.1 Manufacturer: Subject to full compliance with the requirements of this

Specification and other parts of the Contract Document, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

7.2.2 Polymer-Modified Cementitious Waterproofing

[RETAIN OPTIONS BELOW AS APPLICABLE]

A. Positive-Side and Negative-Side, Polymer-Modified Cement Waterproofing: Provide manufacturer's pre-packaged, proprietary blend of portland cement. Selected silica, and other ingredients for mixing with potable water or polymer admixture to produce a waterproof coating that is suitable for vertical and horizontal applications below or above grade, is breathable, resists positive-side or negative-side hydrostatic pressure, has VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction, and has properties meeting or exceeding the criteria specified below.

1. Elongation (Ambient): 23 percent at 28 days, minimum. 2. Elongation (Submerged): 16 percent at 28 days, minimum. 3. Compressive Strength: 27 N/mm² at 28 days, minimum. 4. Tensile Strength; 0.6 N/mm² 5. Bond Strength: 1 N/mm², minimum. 6. Water Permeability: Nil.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


7. Crack Bridging: 1mm, minimum.

7.2.3 Accessory Materials

A. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or sealant recommended by waterproofing Manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; and VOC contents complying with limit requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic properties and recommended by waterproofing Manufacturer; resistant to water and moisture but vapor permeable for all standard applications; compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Patching Tape (As Applicable): Where required for critical areas such as

intersections, corner joints, floor-wall-junctions and other where structural and thermal movement of concrete are expected, provide manufacturer’s recommended high performance self adhesive tape.

D. Water: Potable.



7.2.5 Mixes

A. Pre-Packaged, Polymer-Modified Cementitious Waterproofing: Add pre-packaged dry ingredients to mixing liquid component according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Mix with mechanical mixer or by hand to required consistency.


A. Examine substrates, areras and conditions, with Applicator present, for

compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Notify Engineer in writing of defects that would affect system performance.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


B. Begin waterproofing application only after substrate construction and penetration work have been completed and all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

7.3.2 Preparation

A. Protect other works from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and

application of waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying operation while ensuring adequate ambient temperature and conditions for application.

B. Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveal or annular spaces intended for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and pipe sleeves.

C. Stop active water leaks with plugging compound according to waterproofing

manufacturer’s written instructions. D. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound according

to manufacturer’s written instructions. E. Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer’s instructions to

remove efflorescence, chalk, dirt, mortar, spatter, grease, oil, paint, curing compounds, and form-release agents to ensure waterproofing bonding to surfaces.

1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258. 2. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer’s

written instructions.

7.3.3 Application

A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer’s written instruction for application and curing unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of the system.

1. Saturate surface with water and maintain damp condition until applying

waterproofing. Remove standing water. 2. Number of Coats: As required for specified water permeability.

a. Coating Thickness: Maximum application thickness of 1.2 mm per coat for

total thickness as required for specified water permeability. b. Apply first coat as a slurry with brush or roller, and apply subsequent

coats with brush, roller, spray, or trowel. c. Vigorously work first coat onto the substrate, forcing the material into

surface voids. Apply each subsequent coat into full contact with previous coat.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


d. Allow manufacturer's recommended time between coats. Dampen surface between coats.

e. Final Coat Finish: Smooth-Troweled or Brushed, as required for type of application indicated.

B. Curing: Moist-cure waterproofing for not less than Three (3) days immediately

after application has set, followed by air-drying prior to being placed in service unless otherwise recommended on writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Protect surface from wind, heat, and rain until fully cured.

C. Extend waterproofing treatment as follows:

1. Onto columns integral with treated walls. 2. Onto untreated interior walls intersecting treated exterior walls, to a distance

of not less than 600mm. 3. Onto wall base, for a height of not less than 300mm where floors, but not

walls, are treated. 4. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including pipe

trenches, pipe chases, pits, sumps, and similar offsets and features.


A. Inspection: Engage waterproofing Manufacturer’s representative to inspect completed application and to prepare a written report that application complies with Manufacturer’s written instructions.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-14-08-1/7 COLD-APPLIED RUBBER-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS WATERPROOFING

SECTION 14 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING PART 8 COLD-APPLIED RUBBER-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS

WATERPROOFING 8.1 GENERAL 8.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes the general requirements necessary for, and incidental to, the complete supply and installation of liquid-applied waterproofing system for the following:

1. Interior wet areas including Toilet, Bathroom, Kitchen, and Pantry areas. 2. Balcony/Terrace areas.

8.1.2 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, and installation instructions for rubber-modified bituminous waterproofing.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for

substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C. Samples: For each of the following:

1. Flashing sheet, 250 by 200 mm. 2. Membrane-reinforcing fabric, 250 by 200 mm.

D. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and Applicator. E. Product Certificates: For waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials, from

manufacturer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Field quality-control reports. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.



VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


A. Manufacturer’s Qualification: Engage a Manufacturer that is 9001:2000 certified or one that employs an equivalent or higher system of quality management; with a minimum of Ten (10) years documented experience in manufacture/fabrication of product required for this Project; and capable of providing field service representation during installation.

B. Applicator’s Qualification: Engage a highly-experienced Applicator trained,

authorized and certified in writing by the Manufacturer for the installation of their product, having a record of successful in-service performance in previous Projects, and eligible to receive manufacturer’s special warranty.

C. Source Limitation: Obtain primary material and primer through one source from a single Manufacturer. If required, provide secondary material recommended by Manufacturer of primary material.

D. Mockups: Provide mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals

and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical vertical and horizontal surfaces 0.9 sq. m in size. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the


E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.



1. Manufacturer’s name and trademark. 2. Manufacture and expiry date of material. 3. Method of application and mixing with other components of the system.


temperature recommended by Manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14



A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures and other Project site conditions recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

B. Coordinate Works with other trades to ensure adequate illumination, ventilation,

and dust-free environment during application and curing of membrane. The Applicator shall have sole right to access the specified work area for the time needed to complete the application and allow the membrane to cure adequately.

C. Protect adjoining works or surface of work area from damage.

8.1.6 Warranty

A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace material that does not comply with requirements or fails to perform accordingly, within the specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate

prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1.6 mm in width.

2. Warranty Period: Not less than Ten (10) years from date of Substantial completion.

8.2 PRODUCT 8.2.1 Manufacturer: Subject to full compliance with the requirements of this


8.2.2 COLD-APPLIED RUBBER-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS WATERPROOFING

A. Provide liquid-applied high-build elastomeric bituminous coating designed to provide seamless membrane waterproofing system; complying to ASTM C 836 and having properties meeting or exceeding the criteria specified below:.

1. Rubber Content: Not less than 5 percent in the Dried Film. 2. Dry Film Thickness: Not less than 1.5mm in 2 coats.

8.2.3 Miscellaneous Materials

A. Surface Primer: As recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for the type of application required.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


B. Sealants: Shall be cold applied rubber-modified bituminous sealant recommended by waterproofing manufacturer

C. Backing Rod: Waterproofing manufacturer’s standard closed-cell polyethylene

foam rod. D. Flexible Flashing: As per waterproofing manufacturer’s recommendation. E. Protection Course: Where required, provide waterproofing manufacturer’s

recommended 6mm thick asphalt protection board.

F. Protection Course to wet floor areas: Waterproofing system shall be covered with sand-cement mortar screed applied on polyethylene sheet.

G. Reinforcement: Where required, provide reinforcing scrim recommended by

waterproofing manufacturer.




A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Conditions for Concrete Surfaces:

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

C. Begin waterproofing application only after substrate construction and penetration work have been completed and all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

8.3.2 Surface Preparation

A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written

recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or

overspray affecting other construction. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and

migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds,

acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate

pockets, and other voids. 8.3.3 Preparation at Termination and Penetrations

A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through

waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing

strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-

wall butt joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

8.3.4 Joint and Crack Treatment

A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces.

1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a

minimum of 75 mm along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.

B. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work

penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


8.3.5 Application

A. Application, General

1. Start applying waterproofing in the presence of waterproofing manufacturer's

technical representative. 2. Priming: Shall be per membrane manufacturer’s instructions. Primer is not

required for adhesion to dry, non-porous concrete. 3. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer’s written instruction. Two

coats should be applied, allowing the first coat to dry completely before applying the second. The second coat should be applied at right angles to the first. All applications should be continued up verticals to the existing damp proof course. Ensure the membrane is not punctured or damaged during subsequent operations. Where the surface is to receive a render or plaster finish, a keyed surface should be formed by gritting the second coat with clean, dry sand. Allow a minimum of 48 hours drying period before plastering, rendering, or laying floor screed.

B. Application on Wall:

1. Apply waterproofing to wall surfaces up to a height above floor level as

indicated in the Drawing or as recommended by Manufacturer. 2. Apply waterproofing using brush, roller, trowel as recommended by

Manufacturer when spray application is not possible.

C. Application on Floor: 1. Ensure that concrete substrate is clean, smooth and dry.

2. Ensure that prior to application of waterproofing all services penetrations are

completely in place.

3. Provide a minimum 24 hours flood test for all waterproofed areas and coordinate with Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative and Installer for inspection and testing.

4. Coordinate waterproofing Works with tile Installer.

5. Repeat flood testing after installation of tiles.


A. Engage a site representative qualified by the waterproofing manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, and application of the membrane, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Engineer.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


B. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to

recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water.

1. Flood to an average depth of 64 mm with a minimum depth of 25 mm and not

exceeding a depth of 100 mm. Maintain 50 mm of clearance from top of sheet flashings.

2. Flood each area for 24 hours minimum, to ASTM d 5957. 3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs

until waterproofing installation is watertight. 4. Engineer, Contractor, Manufacturer’s representative shall observe flood

testing and jointly examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.

8.3.7 Curing, Protection and Cleaning

A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. 1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. 2. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of

construction period.

8.3.8 Application of Screed or Other Finishing Material

A. Protection or leveling screed over waterproofing member for tile application shall be done only after water testing and required rectification, if any, is complete

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-14-09-1/6 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

SECTION 14 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING PART 9 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING 9.1 GENERAL 9.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes the general requirements necessary for, and incidental to, the complete supply and installation of crystalline waterproofing to water-retaining (positive-side) and water-excluding (negative-side) concrete structures, where indicated in the Drawing.


A. The minimum standard for products specified in this Section shall include, but not limited to relevant BS and ASTM standards. Except as otherwise specified herein, perform Works in accordance with the latest applicable specification codes, standard publications and other supplements from the approved Manufacturer, including the ff.: 1. ACI 305R-99 – Hot Weather Concreting 2. ACI 306R-88 – Cold Weather Concreting 3. ASTM C 39/ C 39M – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Cylindrical Concrete Specimen 4. ASTM C 309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming

Compounds for Curing Concrete 5. ASTM C 666 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid

Freezing and Thawing 6. ASTM E 329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing

and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction 7. COE CRD-C 48 – Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete 8. NSF 61 – Drinking Water Components-Health Effects

9.1.3 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, and installation instructions for crystalline waterproofing.

B. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer and Applicator. C. Product Certificates: For waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials, from

manufacturer. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for crystalline waterproofing.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


E. Field quality-control reports. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualification: Engage a Manufacturer that is 9001:2000 certified or one that employs an equivalent or higher system of quality management; with a minimum of Ten (10) years documented experience in manufacture/fabrication of product required for this Project; and capable of providing field service representation during installation.

B. Applicator’s Qualification: Engage a highly-experienced Installer trained, authorized and certified in writing by the Manufacturer for the application of their product, having a record of successful in-service performance in previous Projects, and eligible to receive manufacturer’s special warranty.

C. Mockups: Provide mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical vertical and horizontal surfaces 0.9 sq. m in size. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the


D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions and Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements.

2. Notify Owner and Engineer seven (7) days in advance of date and time of meeting.


A. Deliver materials to site undamaged and in sealed original containers with label indicating: 1. Manufacturer’s name and trademark. 2. Manufacture and expiry date of material. 3. Method of application and mixing with other components of the system.


temperature recommended by Manufacturer.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14



A. Weather Limitation: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather condition permit crystalline waterproofing to be performed according to Manufacturer’s written instruction.

B. Proceed with waterproofing only after pipe sleeves, drains, vents and other

projections through the substrate have been completed. C. Proceed with waterproofing only after substrate is free of honeycombs, voids,

cracks and other defects. D. Keep space well-ventilated, water-free and within ambient temperature

recommended by waterproofing Manufacturer. 9.1.7 Warranty

A. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which Manufacturer agree to repair or replace material that does not comply with requirements or fails to perform accordingly, within the specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Not less than Five (5) years from date of Substantial

Completion.

9.2 PRODUCT

9.2.1 Manufacturer: Subject to full compliance with the requirements of this Specification and other parts of the Contract Document, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

9.2.2 Crystalline Waterproofing

A. Prepackaged, proprietary blend of portland cement, specially treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with water and applied, penetrates into concrete and concrete unit masonry and reacts chemically with the byproducts of cement hydration in the presence of water to develop crystalline growth within substrate capillaries to produce an impervious, dense, waterproof substrate; that has VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction; with properties meeting or exceeding the criteria specified below:

1. Water Permeability: Maximum zero for water at 9 meter when tested

according to CE CRD-C 48. 2. Compressive Strength: Minimum 27.6 MPa at 28 days when tested according

to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 3. Potable Water Contact Approval: NSF Certification for use on structures

holding potable water, based on testing in accordance with NSF 61.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


9.2.3 Accessory Materials

A. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or sealant recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, tie holes, reveals, and other concrete defects; compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with

hydrophobic properties and recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and moisture but vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead, and horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); compatible with substrate and other materials indicated; and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Portland Cement: To ASTM C 150, Type I. D. Sand: To ASTM C 144. E. Water: Potable.


A. Provide other materials including waterproofing manufacturer’s standard or recommended bond-strengthening, adhesion, and repair admixtures, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as recommended by the waterpoofing Manufacturer as compatible, subject to review and approval by the Engineer.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for suitable

conditions where waterproofing is to be applied.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Notify Architect in writing of active leaks or other defects that would affect system

performance.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


9.3.2 Preparation

A. Protect other work from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and

application of waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to confine spraying operation and to ensure adequate ambient temperatures and ventilation conditions for application.

B. Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or

annular spaces intended for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between pipes and pipe sleeves.

C. Stop active water leaks with plugging compound according to waterproofing

manufacturer's written instructions. D. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound according

to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written

instructions to remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, paint, curing compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to surfaces.

9.3.3 Application

A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application and curing.

B. Saturate surface with water for several hours prior to application and maintain

damp condition until applying waterproofing. Remove standing water. C. Apply to ensure that each coat fills voids and is in full contact with substrate or

previous coat. D. Dampen surface between coats. E. Curing: Moist-cure waterproofing for three (3) days immediately after final coat

has set, followed by air drying, unless otherwise recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

F. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Extend waterproofing treatment as follows:

1. Onto columns integral with treated walls. 2. Onto interior nontreated walls intersecting exterior treated walls, for a

distance of 600 mm for cast-in-place concrete and 1200 mm for masonry. 3. Onto exterior walls and onto both exterior and interior columns, for a height of

300 mm, where floors, but not walls, are treated.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


4. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including pipe trenches, pipe chases, pits, and similar offsets and features.

G. Where indicated or required for increased abrasion resistance, apply manufacturer’s standard dry-shake formulation according to waterproofing manufacturer’s written instructions.

9.3.4 Interface With Other Materials

A. Backfilling: Commence backfilling with moist backfill material only after a minimum of 36 hours after waterproofing application, or as recommended in writing by the manufacturer.

B. Paint, Epoxy, and Similar Coating: Commence coating application only after waterproofing has cured and set, or after a minimum of 21 days. Prepare waterproofing-treated surface for coating application according to waterproofing and coating manufacturer’s recommendation.


A. Inspection: Engage manufacturer's representative to inspect completed application and provide a written report that application complies with manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Protect waterroofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove components or parts of Works that do not comply with requirements, repair to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion and according to warranty requirements.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-14-10-1/5 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

SECTION 14 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING PART 10 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 10.1 GENERAL 10.1.1 Summary


1. Cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing. 2. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.

10.1.2 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.

B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers certifying that

proposed products comply with the requireemtns of the Project. C. Qualification Data: For dampproofing manufacturer. D. Product Test Reports: Evaluation based on comprehensive tests performed by

dampproofing manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of waterproofing system.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Unless accepted otherwise by the Engineer, Manufacturer of products in this Part shall be ISO 9001-2000 certified, or higher

B. Source Limitation: Obtain primary material and primer through one source from a single Manufacturer. If required, provide secondary material recommended by Manufacturer of primary material.

10.1.4 Storage and Handling


1. Manufacturer’s name and trademark. 2. Manufacture and expiry date of material.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


3. Method of application and mixing with other components of the system.

B. Store materials in a dry area away from direct sunlight, within range of temperature recommended by Manufacturer.


A. Weather Limitation: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather condition permit according to Manufacturer’s recommendation.

B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application. Maintain ventilation

until waterproofing has cured. 10.1.6 Warranty

A. Contractor shall provide written warranty, countersigned by the coating Manufacturer, guaranteeing to repair or replace coatings that fail in material and workmanship within the specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Not less than Five (5) years from date of Substantial

Completion. 10.2 PRODUCT 10.2.1 Manufacturer: Subject to full compliance with the requirements of this


10.2.2 Bituminous Dampproofing and Waterproofing

A. Cold-Applied, Cut-Back (Solvent-Based) Asphalt Waterproofing:

1. Trowel Coats: To ASTM D 4586, Type I. 2. Brush and Spray Coats: To ASTM D 4479, Type I.

B. Cold-Applied, Emulsified-Asphalt Waterproofing:

1. Trowel Coats: To ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. 2. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: To ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. 3. Brush and Spray Coats: To ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1.


A. Cut-Back (Solvent-Based) Asphalt Primer: To ASTM D 41.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: To ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended by Manufacturer.

C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: To ASTM D 1668, Type 1. D. Protection Course to exterior, below-grade surfaces of concrete, masonry,

foundation and retaining walls: Asphalt-board type, pre-moulded, 3mm thick, multi-ply, semi-rigid board consisting of mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film.




A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Begin waterproofing application only after substrate construction and penetration work have been completed and all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

10.3.2 Preparation

A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted or coated with waterproofing materials. Prevent waterproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains.

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints and apply bond breakers if required, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.

C. Where required, apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes,

honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric.

10.3.3 Application, General

A. Comply with Manufacturer’s written recommendation unless more stringent

requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


1. Apply additional coats if recommended by Manufacturer or required to

achieve coverages indicated. 2. Apply second coat at right angle direction to first coat. 3. Allow each coat of waterproofing to cure 24 Hours before applying

subsequent coats. 4. Allow 24 hours drying time prior to backfilling.

B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall

faces building interior. 1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing,

and down a minimum of 150 mm over outside face of footing. 2. Extend 300 mm onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto

surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external

corners, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 200-mm- wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.

C. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls. 1. Lap dampproofing at least 6 mm onto flashing, masonry reinforcement,

veneer ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe. 2. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete

slabs that interrupt inner wythe, and lap dampproofing at least 6 mm onto shelf angles supporting veneer.

D. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on interior face of above-grade, exterior concrete and masonry walls unless walls are indicated to receive direct application of paint. 1. Continue dampproofing through intersecting walls by keeping vertical mortar

joints at intersection temporarily open or by delaying construction of intersecting walls until dampproofing is applied.

E. Contractor’s Option: Provide cold-applied, cut-back or cold-applied, emulsified asphalt dampproofing, as specified in subsequent articles for substrates indicated, subject to the following limitations: 1. Use cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing only on exterior surfaces of

building and exterior face of inner wythe of cavity walls. 2. Use cold-applied, emulsified asphalt dampproofing on surfaces other than

below-grade exterior surfaces.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 14


10.3.4 Application of Cold-Applied, Cut- Back Asphalt Dampproofing (Where

Applicable)

A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 0.5 L/sq. m for first coat and 0.4 L/sq. m for second coat, or 1 trowel coat at not less than 1.6 L/sq. m.

B. On Backs of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less

than 0.5 L/sq. m. C. On Backs of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at

not less than 0.5 L/sq. m. D. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or

spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.

10.3.5 Application of Cold-Applied, Emulsified Asphalt Dampproofing (Where Applicable)

A. On Concrete Substrate of Dimension Stone and Other Façade Cladding System, where specified: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.

B. On Masonry Substrate of Dimension Stone and Other Façade Cladding, where specified: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 0.4 L/sq. m.

10.3.6 Installation of Protection Course

A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed and cured

damproofing. Comply with system Manufacturer’s written recommendation for attaching protection course. 1. Support protection course with spot application of trowel-grade mastic.

10.3.7 Cleaning

A. Remove waterproofing material from surfaces not intended to receive application.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-15-00-1/1

SECTION 15 THERMAL INSULATION OF BUILDINGS

This Section specifies the type, quality and application of building insulation, firestopping and other related joint caulking and insulation. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Works as indicated herein, including all other incidental works as may be necessary or required for the completion of the project, shall comply with Section 15 and other relevant sections of QCS-2007.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-15-04-1/7 BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION 15 THERMAL INSULATION OF BUILDING PART 4 BUILDING INSULATION 4.1 GENERAL

4.1.1 Summary


services and operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of the following:

1. Concealed Building Insulation 2. Exposed Building Insulation 3. Thermal Insulation



4.1.3 Definition

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with the latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.

4.1.4 Submittals


1. Complete list of all items proposed to be installed under this Part. 2. Manufacturer’s specification and other data necessary to demonstrate

compliance with this Specification including product performance data. 3. Manufacturer’s installation manual.

B. Product test report from and base on tests performed by a qualified independent

testing agency certifying compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including thermal resistance, fire test response characteristics, water vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


C. Samples: 300mm square samples of products indicated and all fixing accessories.

D. As-built Drawings: At project close-out, showing installation details of products

unstalled, in accordance with the Drawings and requirements of this Specification.


A. Unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer, use Manufacturers that employ a Quality Management System compling with the program described in ISO 9001-2000, or similar.

B. Single Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building

insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work.

C. Fire-Test Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with

the Fire-Test Response indicated on Drawings or as specified in this Part as determined by a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to authiorities having jurisdiction. Identifiy materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: To ASTM E 84 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: To ASTM E 119 3. Combustion Characteristics: To ASTM E 136


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling and other deleterious materials. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with Manufacturer’s written instruction for handling, storage and protecting products during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


4.2 PRODUCTS


4.2.2 Insulating Materials, General: Provide insulating materials that comply with

requirements and with referenced standards. Insulating materials shall be 100% free of asbestos.

A. Pre-formed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from

Manufacturer’s standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 4.2.3 Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation for Roof and Cavity Wall Insulation

(As Applicable)

A. Unless specified otherwise, provide non-absorbent, extruded, closed cell polystyrene board insulation to ASTM C 578, and having the following minimum requirements:

1. Edges: Shiplap edges, except for 25mm thick board which shall be square

edged. 2. Capillarity: Nil 3. Density: To ASTM D 1622; 32-35 kg/cu.m., minimum. 4. Compressive Strength: To ASTM D 1621; 300 kPa. 5. Maximum Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: To ASTM E 84; 5 and 165,

respectively. 6. Thickness: As indicated in the Drawing.

4.2.4 Mineral Fiber Board Insulation

A. Faced Slag-Wool or Rock-Wool Fiber Board: To ASTM C 612; with vapor-retardant foil facing on 1 sideand passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics and having the following minimum requirements:

1. Minimum Density: 90 kg/cu.m. 2. Maximum Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: To ASTM E 84, 25 and 0,

respectively. 3. Thickness: as indicated in the Drawing.

B. Unfaced Slag-Wool or Rock-Wool Fiber Board: To ASTM C 612; passing ASTM

E 136 for combustion characteristics and having the following minimum requirements:

1. Minimum Density: 90 kg/cu.m.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


2. Maximum Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: To ASTM E 84, 15 and 0, respectively.

3. Thickness: as indicated in the Drawing.

4.2.5 Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation

A. To ASTM C 665, Type I (blanket without membrane facing); Unfaced, semi-rigid, slag-wool or rock-wool fiber blanket/batt insulation produced by combining semi-refractory mineral fiber with thermosetting resin binders; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics and having the following minimum requirements:

1. Minimum Density: 40 kg/cu.m. 2. Maximum Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: To ASTM E 84, 15 and 20,


4.2.6 Glass-Mat-Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation

A. To ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IA and IB; thermal insulation combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders and foil facing on one side and passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics and having the following minimum requirements:

1. Facing: Vapor-retardant reinforced foil facing. 2. Maximum Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: To ASTM E 84, 25 and 50,


4.2.7 Auxiliary Insulating Materials

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

B. Protection Board: Pre-molded, semi-rigid asphalt/fiber composition board, 6mm

thick, formed under heat and pressures; standard sizes.

4.2.8 Insulation Fasteners

A. Adhesively Attached Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon steel sheet, 0.75mm thick by 50mm

square.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


2. Spindle: Copper-coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 3mm in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation material.

3. Where spindle will be exposed to human contactahter installation, protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap.

B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.4mm thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 40mm square or in diameter.

C. Insulation Standoff: Spacers fabricated from galvanized mild steel sheet for fitting

over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of dimension indicated between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.

D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation

anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrate.


A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as recommended by insulation Manufacturer as compatible, subject to review and approval by the Engineer.

4.3 EXECUTION

4.3.1 Examination

A. Examine substrates and condition, with Installer present, for compliances with

requirements and for any unsatisfactory work which may adversely affect performance of insulation.

1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

4.3.2 Preparation A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation materials, including

removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or interfere with the proper installation of insulation.

B. Close off openings in cavities receiving pored-in-place or semi-rigid insulation

material to prevent subsequent displacement.



VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


A. Comply with Manufacturer’s written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install only undamaged, dry and unsoiled insulation material. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated.

Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with proper placement.

D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple

layers are otherwise shown or required to achieve total thickness.

4.3.4 Installation of General Building Insulation A. Apply insulation units to substrates by methods complying with Manufacturer’s

written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between closed cell insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or

sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by Manufacturer.

C. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to

the following requirements:

1. Use blanket widths and legnths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required, provide legnths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place blanket in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

D. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows:

1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor

adhesive according to anchor manufacuturer’s written instruction. Space anchors according to Insulation Manufacturer’s written instruction for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.

2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation.

3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.

4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tip of spindles.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


4.3.5 Protection

A. General: Protect installed insulation materials from damage due to harmful

weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-15-05-1/8 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM

SECTION 15 THERMAL INSULATION OF BUILDING PART 5 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM 5.1 GENERAL

5.1.1 Summary

A. Part includes duly-tested firestop system for the following building assemblies,

where indicated for fire-rated construction:

1. Openings between structurally-separated sections of walls and floors. 2. Gaps between top of walls and slab soffits. 3. Expansion/control joints in walls and floors.

5.1.2 Definition

A. Firestopping: Material or combination of material used to retain integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and hot gases between joints and through penetrations in fire-rated wall and floor assemblies.

5.1.3 References

A. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) test joint systems as designated per UL 2079,

“Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems”, with test results updated and published annually, complete with mid-year supplement, in the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory

a. Joint Systems (XHBN) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV) c. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Materials (XHHW) d. Forming Materials (XHKU)

B. For Test Requirements: ASTM E 1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive

Joint Systems


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


C. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgements

D. ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

5.1.4 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Submit Manufacturer’s specification and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop system to be used and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's

illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Engineering judgement must describe must include both project name and name of Installer who will install fire-resistive joint system as described in the drawing detail.

2. Submit material safety data sheets provided with products delivered on site.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" article evidencing compliance to required capabilities and experience.

D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have

been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed

by a qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems. 5.1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Manufacturer of products in this Part shall be ISO 9001-2000 certified, or higher. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified,

licensed, or otherwise qualified by the fire-resistive joint system Manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install their fire-resistive products per specified requirements of the Project. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


1. A fire-resistive joint system Manufacturer’s direct representative (not

distributor or agent) shall be present on site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate personnel of Contractor in the proper selection and installation procedures and to ensure that all materials selection and assembly method shall comply to Manufacturer’s written recommendation, as published in their literature and drawing details.

C. Source Limitation: Obtain primary fire-resistive joint system materials through

one source from a single Manufacturer. If required, provide secondary material recommended in writing by Manufacturer of primary fire-resistive joint system material.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Firestopping systems shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Firestop systems that are identical to those tested per testing standard

referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire-resistive joint system products shall bear classification marking of

qualified testing agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems corresponding to those indicated by reference

to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) For firestop application having no UL-tested system available through

manufacturers, an engineering judgement derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction, for their review and approval, prior to installation. Engineering judgement drawings must comply with requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.

E. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with Owner or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative, Installer and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Part, prior to start of installation. 1. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions and Manufacturer’s

installation and warranty requirements. 2. Notify Owner and Engineer Seven (7) days in advance of date and time of

meeting.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15



A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, condensation, or other causes.

B. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.

C. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.


A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer’s clearly labeled, unopened containers, properly identifying brand, type, and UL label, where applicable.

B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job site.

C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damge in compliance

with manufacturer’s requirements, including temperature restrictions. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions, or remedies described in

material safety data sheet, as applicable. E. Do not use damaged or expired materials.

5.1.8 Coordination

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least Seven (7) days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

5.2 PRODUCTS

5.2.1 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems

A. General: Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed, and as follows: 1. Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079. 2. Provide firestop materials and system conforming to applicable governing

codes set forth by local authorities having jurisdiction 3. Provide fire-resistive joint system having components which are compatible

with each other and with substrate under conditions of service and application indicated, as evidenced by testing andfield experience by fire-resistive joint system Manufacturer.

4. Provide ancillary materials for each fire stopping system that are needed to install fill materials, using only components specified by firestopping Manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the fire-resistance-rated construction indicated.

5. Provide fire-resistive joint systems that shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

5.2.2 Materials

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with Joint Systems (XHBN)

listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directoty, provide products from on of the following: 1. Hilti Firestop System 2. Astroflame Firestop Products 3. Intumex

a. Proprietary product mentioned herein is for the purpose of establishing

minimum quality standards. Products from other manufacturers having similar system and material component, of equal or better standard than those specified, and conforming to the design and fire standard requirements indicated, may be proposed by the Contractor, subject to review and approval by the Engineer in writing.

B. Provide firestop products and system that have been tested per UL 2079, for

specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to assembly type, spacing requirements, and recommended in writing by the firestopping Manufacturer as suitable for application on the following in-service conditions in the Project: 1. Sealant, caulking or spray materials for use with fire-rated construction joints

and other gaps. 2. Sealant or caulking materials for use on openings between structurally-

separated sections of walls and floors.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


C. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers, backing and forming materials, required to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated. 1. Where specified, provide mineral fiber backing, of type and thickness

recommended by fire-resistive joint system Manufacturer for the type of application and fire-resistance rating assembly indicated. a. Density: Not less than 64 kg/cu. m. b. Maximum Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: To ASTM E 84, 15 and

0, respectively. D. Provide firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079

which is equal to the fire-resistance rating of construction being joined. 5.3 EXECUTION

5.3.1 Examination

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configurations, substrates, ambient temperature and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


5.3.2 Preparation

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint

systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could

interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of

developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint

system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint

system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

5.3.3 Installation

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems in full compliance with manufacturer's

written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Regulatory Requirement: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill

materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove

combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

D. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to

produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to

produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. E. Protect joint materials on surfaces subjected to traffic from damage during

construction period.

5.3.4 Identification A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach

labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 150 mm of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify

Building Management of Any Damage". 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests

and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only

after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

1. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.

D. Perform under this Part patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.

5.3.6 Cleaning and Protecting

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by

methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

C. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess

firestop materials and soiling as work progresses.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-15-06-1/10 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 15 THERMAL INSULATION OF BUILDING PART 6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 6.1 GENERAL

6.1.1 Summary

A. Part includes duly-tested firestop system for the following building assemblies,

where indicated for fire-rated construction:

1. Penetration for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways and raceway through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions.

2. Openings through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions.

3. Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partitions or walls containing fire doors.

4. Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls.

6.1.2 Definition

A. Firestopping: Material or combination of material used to retain integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and hot gases between joints and through penetrations in fire-rated wall and floor assemblies.

6.1.3 References

A. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) test joint systems as designated per UL 1479,

“Standard for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops”, as published in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, with test results updated annually.

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory

a. Firestop Devices (XHJI) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV) c. Through-Penetration Firestop System (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Materials (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU)


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


B. For Test Requirements: ASTM E 814 – Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops

C. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgements

D. ASTM E 84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

E. For Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174 – Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Firestops.

F. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

G. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code

6.1.4 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Submit Manufacturer’s specification and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop system to be used and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's

illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Engineering judgement must describe must include both project name and name of Installer who will install fire-resistive joint system as described in the drawing detail.

2. Submit material safety data sheets provided with products delivered on site.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" article evidencing compliance to required capabilities and experience.

D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have

been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed

by a qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15



A. Manufacturer of products in this Part shall be ISO 9001-2000 certified, or higher. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified,

licensed, or otherwise qualified by the through-penetration firestop system Manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install their fire-resistive products per specified requirements of the Project. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

1. A through-penetration firestop system Manufacturer’s direct representative

(not distributor or agent) shall be present on site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate personnel of Contractor in the proper selection and installation procedures and to ensure that all materials selection and assembly method shall comply to Manufacturer’s written recommendation, as published in their literature and drawing details.

C. Source Limitation: Obtain primary through-penetration firestop system materials

through one source from a single Manufacturer. If required, provide secondary material recommended in writing by Manufacturer of primary through-penetration firestop system material.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Firestopping systems shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Through-penetration firestop system tests are performed by a qualified

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Firestop systems that are identical to those tested per testing standard

referenced in "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through-penetration firestop system products shall bear classification

marking of qualified testing agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems corresponding to those indicated by

reference to designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) For firestop application having no UL-tested system available through

manufacturers, an engineering judgement derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction, for their review and approval, prior to installation. Engineering judgement drawings must comply with requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.

E. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with Owner or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative, Installer


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Part, prior to start of installation. 1. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions and Manufacturer’s


meeting.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when

ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, condensation, or other causes.

B. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.

C. Install and cure penetration firestopping system per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.


A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer’s clearly labeled, unopened containers, properly identifying brand, type, and UL label, where applicable.

B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job site.

C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damge in compliance

with manufacturer’s requirements, including temperature restrictions. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions, or remedies described in

material safety data sheet, as applicable. E. Do not use damaged or expired materials.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


6.1.8 Coordination

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that pentration firestopping systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

C. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place (integral with concrete placement) firestop devices with trade responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete. 1. Coordinate with responsible trade for adequate spacing of field-run pipes to

allow for proper installation of cast-in-place firestop devices without interference.

D. Notify Owner's testing agency at least Seven (7) days in advance of through

penetration firestopping system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

6.2 PRODUCTS

6.2.1 Through-Penetration Firestopping System

A. General: Where required, Provide penetration firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated, and as follows: 1. Provide through-penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per

UL 1479 and ASTM E 814. 2. Provide firestop materials and system conforming to applicable governing

codes set forth by local authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Provide penetration firestopping components and systems that are

compatible with each other and with substrate forming openings, and with penetrating items if any, under conditions of service and application indicated and as evidenced by testing and field experience by penetration firestop Manufacturer.

4. Provide ancillary materials for each fire stopping system that are needed to install fill materials, using only components specified by firestopping Manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the fire-resistance-rated construction indicated.

5. Provide through-penetration firestopping systems that shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

6.2.2 Materials


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with Through-Penetration

Firestop Systems (XHEZ) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directoty, provide products from one of the following: 1. Hilti Firestop System 2. Astroflame Firestop Products 3. Intumex

a. Proprietary product mentioned herein is for the purpose of establishing

minimum quality standards. Products from other manufacturers having similar system and material component, of equal or better standard than those specified, and conforming to the design and fire standard requirements indicated, may be proposed by the Contractor, subject to review and approval by the Engineer in writing.

B. Provide firestop products and system that have been tested per UL 1479 or

ASTM E 814 for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to assembly type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating indicated, and recommended in writing by the firestopping Manufacturer as suitable for application on the following in-service conditions in the Project: 1. Firestopping devices for use with non-combustible plastic pipe (closed and

open piping system) penetrating concrete floors. 2. Sealants, caulking materials, or foams for use with non-combustible items

including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

3. Sealant or caullking materials for use with sheet metal ducts. 4. Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items

(penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including metal pipe, PVC-jacketed flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe.

5. Foams, intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles.

6. Non-curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealant, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles:

7. Wall opening protective materials for use with UL-listed metallic and non-metallic outlet boxes.

8. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping system).

9. Firestopping system used for complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways.

10. Non-curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways.

11. Blank openings made in fire-rated wall or floor assemblies, where future penetration of pipes, conduits, or cables is expected.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


C. Accessories: Provide components of firestopping systems, including primers, backing and forming materials, required to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated. 1. Where specified, provide mineral fiber backing, of type and thickness

recommended by firestopping system Manufacturer for the type of application and fire-resistance rating assembly indicated.

a. Density: Not less than 64 kg/cu. m. b. Maximum Flame Spread and Smoke Developed: To ASTM E 84, 15 and

0, respectively.

D. Provide firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E 814 which is equal to the fire-resistance rating of construction being penetrated.

6.2.3 Mixing

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

6.3 EXECUTION

6.3.1 Examination A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configurations, substrates, ambient temperature and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for

application of materials. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

6.3.2 Preparation A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing penetration

firestopping to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint

system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from

contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

6.3.3 Installation

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Regulatory Requirement: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill

materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove

combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following

results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


E. Consult with Mechanical Engineer, Project Manager, and damper manufacturer prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of the damper as it pertains to ductworks.

F. Protect firestopping materials on surfaces subjected to traffic from damage during construction period.

6.3.4 Identification

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach

labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 150 mm of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify

Building Management of Any Damage". 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform

tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after

inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

1. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.

D. Perform under this Part patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.

6.3.6 Cleaning and Protecting

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by

methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration


VOLUME 2 SECTION 15


firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

C. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess

firestop materials and soiling as work progresses.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-17-00-1/1

SECTION 17 METALWORKS

This Section provides the specification for shop drawings, engineering, testing, fabrication, delivery, erection and installation of steel and aluminum doors, window and storefront system, including support and cladding system and other architectural metal work. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Works as indicated herein, including all other incidental works as may be necessary or required for the completion of the project, shall comply with Section 17 and other relevant sections of QCS-2007.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-17-07-1/8 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 17 METALWORKS PART 7 METAL FABRICATIONS 7.1 GENERAL

7.1.1 Summary

A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment, and perform all services and operations necessary to execute the work of this Part to install all miscellaneous metal components and accessories, anchors and fastenings and performing all operations in connection with metal fabrication work.

B. This Part establishes requirements for miscellaneous metal fabrication anchors

and supports as required and not detailed elsewhere. C. Metal fabrication work, as specified in this Part, includes any items shown on the

Drawings and/or specified herein, fabricated from metal shapes, plates, bars, pipes, tubes, casting and roll-formed shapes which are not specified in any other Parts of these Specifications and not limited to the following:

1. Rough hardware. 2. Steel Ladders. 3. Loose bearing and levelling plates. 4. Edgings. 5. Miscellaneous trims. 6. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 7. Steel support system for service equipments fixation. 8. Miscellaneous framing and supports.

7.1.2 Submittals

A. Product data for different products including paint products, and grout.

B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication

indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

C. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested. D. Calculation: Provide professionally prepared calculation and other information or

requested.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.

B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural

Welding Code-Steel," AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum," and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel."

[RETAIN FOR EXTERIOR PROJECTS WITH SEVERE SITE CONDITION]


A. As the climate at the project site is particularly corrosive due to its proximity to the ocean, the resulting saline atmosphere, the high average temperature, and the intense solar radiation, the Contractor shall make all provisions necessary to propose, subject to prior approval by the Engineer, and if approved, to install non-corroding products and materials including aluminum, stainless steel and plastics for materials exposed to the exterior environment. Where specifically indicated or where no alternative to steel or other oxidizing metal is possible, such materials shall be protected against corrosion by protective coating, galvanization, or by other method necessary and guaranteed for not less than 10 years.


A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to

which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

7.1.6 Coordination

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete

that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

7.2 PRODUCTS

7.2.1 Ferrous Metal

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the

completed Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786/A 786M. 3. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 653, structural quality, grade 33, with G90

coating. 4. Expanded metal, galvanized: ASTM F1267, Class 2, Grade A. 5. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:

1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. 2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing with

hot-dip galvanised coating per ASTM A 53.

6. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight required by structural loads.

7. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

8. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded.

7.2.2 Aluminum

A. Aluminium Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T6.

7.2.3 Stainless Steel

A. Stainless steel bars and shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316

B. Sheet, strip, plate and flat bars: ASTM A666, Type 316.

7.2.4 Paint

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664, selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanising welds in

galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12,

except containing no asbestos fibers.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


D. Paint separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or preformed dielectric separators, which will prevent galvanic action.

7.2.5 Fasteners

A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25

for electrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM

F 568, Property Class 4.6), with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M), and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3. D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1 (ANSI B18.2.3.8M). E. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.1. F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ANSI B18.22.1 (ANSI B18.22M). G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI B18.21.1. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below

with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

7.2.6 Grout

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

7.3 FABRICATION

7.3.1 General

A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated

but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and

straight sharp edges.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless

otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimise distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and

blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using

concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; co-ordinate with supporting structure.

Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to

minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and co-ordinated installation.

K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish

hardware, screws, and similar items. L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or

provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

7.3.2 Rough Hardware

A. Furnish bent, or otherwise custom-fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish

malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections, and furnish steel washers elsewhere.

7.3.3 Ladders

A. General: Fabricate steel ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions,

spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. All components shall be hot-dip galvanized and painted.

B. Painting: As indicated in Section 26.

7.3.4 Loose Bearing and Levelling Plates

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of the required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication.

7.3.5 Miscellaneous Steel Trim

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates,

and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices wherever possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required to co-ordinate assembly

and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 150 mm from each end, 150 mm from corners, and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

7.3.6 Steel and Iron Finishes

A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by the

hot-dip process complying with the following requirements:

1. ASTM A 153 for galvanising iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A 123 for galvanising both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel

products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.76 mm thick or more.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to

comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning."


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with

galvanized finishes or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting.

7.4 INSTALLATION

7.4.1 Preparation

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,

instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect

sleeves from water and concrete entry.


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for

installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built

into concrete masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld

connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimise distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and

blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


5. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminium that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

7.4.3 Setting Loose Plates

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.

B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices.

After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.

7.4.4 Installing Miscellaneous Framing and Supports

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being

supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

7.4.5 Adjusting and Cleaning

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. Apply by brush or spray to provide a 0.05mm minimum dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas,

and apply galvanising repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-17-08-1/12 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

SECTION 17 METALWORKS PART 8 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 8.1 GENERAL

8.1.1 Summary

A. Furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment and provide all services and

operations necessary for the complete fabrication, supply and installation of all works for aluminum window assemblies, as indicated in the Drawings.


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as

determined by testing of Manufacturer's standard aluminum window assemblies representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Aluminum window assemblies shall withstand movements of supporting

structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other

components. e. Failure of operating units.

3. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.

B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum window assemblies, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Wind Load: Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-

load design pressures calculated according to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever is more stringent.

1. Design to a basic wind speed of 162 km/hr. (45 m/sec.).

D. Provide aluminum window assemblies tested according to ASTM E 330 for

Structural-Test Performance as follows:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 30 seconds.

E. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limit to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 3mm, whichever is less.

a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1.6-mm clearance between framing

members and operable units. b. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point,

limit deflection to two times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.

3. Dead Load: Provide members that do not deflect an amount, which will

reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.

F. Seismic Performance: Aluminum window assemblies shall withstand the effects

of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5, unless more stringent factor is required.

G. Air Infiltration: Provide window assemblies with maximum air leakage through

fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.03 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 300 Pa.

H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide window assemblies that do

not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 480 Pa.

I. Thermal Movements: Provide window assemblies that allow for thermal

movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.

J. Condensation Resistance: Provide window assemblies with fixed glazing and

framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

K. Thermal Conductance: Provide window assemblies with fixed glazing and framing areas having average thermal conductance (U-vaue) indicated when tested according to AAMA 1503.

1. U-value: Not more than 1.80 W/m²K, unless indicated otherwise.

L. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum assemblies with fixed glazing and

framing areas having the following sound-transmission characteristics when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90, “Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements”.

1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Not less than 34.

8.1.3 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,

material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For window assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for

draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-

framed systems, made from 300-mm lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Expansion provisions. 3. Glazing. 4. Flashing and drainage. 5. Hardware, including operators.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


F. Hardware Schedule (As Applicable): Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each opening.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For window assemblies] indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

H. Qualification Data: For qualified Manufacturer.

I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

a qualified preconstruction testing agency, for window assemblies, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

J. Field quality-control reports.

K. Maintenance Data: For window assemblies to include in maintenance manuals.

L. Warranties: Sample of special warranties to be issued upon completion of the Project.


A. Unless accepted otherwise by the Engineer, Manufacturer of products in this Part

shall be ISO 9001-2000 certified, or higher.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating window assemblies that meet or exceed energy performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by certification, labeling, and inclusion in lists.

C. Installer’s Qualification: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained

and approved for installation of units required for this Project, experienced in fabrication and installation of aluminum assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Assumes responsibility for engineering aluminum assemly units to comply

with the requirements of the Project. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.

2. Professional Engineer Qualification: A Professional Engineer legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services include, but are not limited to, those performed for the complete installation of aluminum assemblies that are similar in material, design, and scope to those indicated for the Project.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except

with Engineer's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data for Architect’s review and Engineer’s approval in writing.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the

following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

G. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of

energy performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.

H. Source Limitation: For window assemblies; obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and

to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the


2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

J. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with Owner or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative, Installer and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Part, prior to start of installation. 1. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions and Manufacturer’s


meeting.



VOLUME 2 SECTION 17




A. Deliver components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging.

B. Store components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or

concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air.


A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before

fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work.

8.1.8 Warranty

A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the Manufacturer and

contractor agreeing to repair or replace components of aluminum works that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond

normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Glazing breakage. f. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Not less than Ten (10) years from date of Substantial

Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. Warranty Period for Externally-Exposed Finishes: Not less than Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Internally-Exposed Finishes: Not less than Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.

8.2 PRODUCTS

8.2.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with this Specification and other parts of the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

8.2.2 Materials

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: To ASTM B 209M. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: To ASTM B 221M. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: To ASTM B 429M. 4. Structural Profiles: To ASTM B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: To AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: To ASTM A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: To ASTM A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

8.2.3 Framing System

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction, for Interior Assemblies: Non-thermal. 2. Construction, for External Assemblies: Thermally-broken. 3. Provide Manufacturer’s standard framing construction that has been in use

for not less than three years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer’s standard high-strength aluminum

with non-staining, non-ferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Where use of aluminum is not feasible, provide non-magnetic stainless steel

or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. 4. Where exposed fasteners are necessary, provide countersunk Philips screw

heads with finish matching framing system. D. Concrete and Masonty Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable iron, or

steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.

E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent material, and of type recommended by Manufacturer.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer’s standard, recommended

for joint type indicated.

1. Where required, provide Manufacturer’s standard replaceable compressible weatherstripping gaskets made of extruded EPDM.

G. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 0.4mm dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

8.2.4 Glazing System

A. Glazing: Types and sizes of glasses shall be as specified in Section 25 – Glass

and Glazing, of this Specification.

B. Glazing Gaskets, Spacers, Setting Blocks, Sealant Backings, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, non-migrating types compatible with sealants and suitable for joint movement and assembly performance requirements.

8.2.5 Hardware

A. All hardware shall be approved prior to installation.

B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as required or specified for operation of each

unit, including the items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required subject to approval.

8.2.6 Fabrication

A. General: fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following

characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members,

and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accomodation for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing

to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to

greatest extent possible.

B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and

grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. 2. Weld in concealed location to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion

or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

3. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site.

4. Preglaze window and frame units to greatest extent possible.

C. Hardware Installation: Factory-install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcement as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.

E. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members.

F. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against

galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with approved-type corrosion-resistant coating.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their location in Project

according to approved Shop Drawings.

8.2.7 Aluminum Finishes

A. General: Provide coating manufacturer’s standard system especially formulated to provide required color stability, gloss retention, and corrosion resistance, and meeting or exceeding industry standard indicated.

B. For Internally-Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Standard Powder Coated Finish:

Factory-applied TGIC-free, standard-durability polyester powder coating system. Prepare, treat, and apply on bare clean, corrosion- and contamination-free, mill-


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


finish metal surface according to AAMA 2603 standards and coating manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Film Thickness: 60 to 80 microns, or as recommended by coating

Manufacturer. 2. Finish and Gloss: As per Engineer’s approved sample from the coating

Manufacturer’s full range. C. For Externally-Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Super Durable Powder Coated

Finish: Factory-applied TGIC-free, high-performance polyester powder coating system. Prepare, treat, and apply on bare clean, corrosion- and contamination-free, mill-finish metal surface according to AAMA 2604 standards and coating manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Film Thickness: 60 to 80 microns, or as recommended by coating


Manufacturer’s full range. D. Identification marks shall not appear on finished surfaces.

8.3 EXECUTION

8.3.1 Examination

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work.


8.3.2 Installation

A. General: Comply with Manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.

C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or

gaskets, as shown on Shop Drawings, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Section 24 for "Joint Sealants" for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with the units. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of the Work.

D. Verify dimensions of openings by field measurements so those units will be

accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


E. Coordinate with the work of other trades and provide items to be placed during the installation of other work. Check the location of such items and verify that they have been set accurately in relation to the final location of units.

F. Erection Tolerances: Erect within the following tolerances:

1. Variation from plumb: 3mm maximum. 2. Variation from level: 3mm maximum.

G. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the

manufacturer or fabricator and in accordance with his recommendations. Do not cut through reinforcing members. Restore finish completely to protect material and remove all evidence of cutting and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and trimming have impaired strength or appearance.

H. Do not erect members which are observed to be warped, bowed, deformed or

otherwise damaged or defaced to such extent as to impair strength or appearance. Remove and replace members damaged in the process of erection, as directed.

I. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on metal

shims and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar supports anchored to supporting structure. Use only the tapes of equipment, ropes, wedges, spacers, shims and other items during erection which will not stain or mark the finish of units.

J. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with a heavy coating of

bituminous paint, or provide other separation as per manufacturer's recommendations.

K. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material

being welded, and in accordance with appropriate recommendations of the AWS. Use only methods which will avoid distortion or discolouration of exposed faced. Grind exposed welds smooth, using only clean wheels and compounds which are free of iron or iron compounds. Restore finish of component parts after welding and grinding.

L. Solder and braze only to fill or seal joints (not to form structural joints), and in

accordance with component part manufacturer's recommendations. Grind smooth and restore finish.

M. Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts, which will be concealed, with zinc

chromate paint.

N. Seal joints in a concealed manner, unless exposed sealant is shown.

O. Adjust hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weather stripping. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

8.3.3 Adjusting


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without

binding, and for weathertight closure.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent approved testing agency to perform testing indicated. Test areas shall be as indicated or as directed.

B. Air Infiltration: Test areas of installed system for compliance with system

performance requirements according to ASTM E 783.

C. Water Penetration: Test areas of installed system for compliance with system performance requirements according to ASTM E 1105 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,” but not less than 299 Pa.

D. Water Spray Test: After completing the installation, test system for water

penetration according to AAMA 501.2 in areas directed.

E. Repair or remove work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing; replace to conform to specified requirements.


A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation,

exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.

B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces. C. Adjust operable units and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at

contact points and weatherstripping.

8.3.6 Protection

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that system will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-17-09-1/14 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT

SECTION 17 METALWORKS PART 9 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 9.1 GENERAL

9.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes the following aluminum-framed assemblies:

1. Entrance doors and door-frame units. 2. Exterior storefront framing. 3. Interior storefront framing.

9.1.2 Related Parts

A. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall – Section 17.

B. Ironmongery – Section 18.


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as

determined by testing of Manufacturer's standard assemblies representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Aluminum assemblies shall withstand movements of supporting structure

indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other

components. d. Failure of operating units. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

3. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.

B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum assemblies, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Wind Load: Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-

load design pressures calculated according to requirements of local authorities


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever is more stringent.

1. Design to a basic wind speed of 162 km/hr. (45 m/sec.).

D. Provide aluminum assemblies tested according to ASTM E 330 for Structural-

Test Performance as follows:




E. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limit to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever is less.


a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1.6-mm clearance between framing

members and operable units. b. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point,

limit deflection to two times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.

3. Dead Load: Provide members that do not deflect an amount, which will

reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.

F. Seismic Performance: Aluminum assemblies shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. Component Importance Factor: 1.5, unless more stringent factor is required.

G. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum assemblies with maximum air leakage through

fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.03 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 300 Pa.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum assemblies that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 480 Pa.

I. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum assemblies that allow for thermal

movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material

surfaces.

J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum assemblies with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

K. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum assemblies with fixed glazing and framing areas having average thermal conductance (U-vaue) indicated when tested according to AAMA 1503.

1. U-value: Not more than 1.80 W/m²K, unless indicated otherwise.

L. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum assemblies with fixed glazing and

framing areas having the following sound-transmission characteristics when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90, “Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements”.

1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Not less than 34

[RETAIN FOR STRUCTURALLY-GLAZED ASSEMBLY]

M. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by aluminum-framed systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly,

leaving no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does

not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

9.1.4 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for

draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior


D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-

framed systems, made from 300-mm lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. 6. Hardware, including operators.

F. Hardware Schedule (As Applicable): Submit complete hardware schedule

organized into sets based on hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete designations of every item required for each door opening.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum assemblies indicated to comply with


H. Qualification Data: For qualified Manufacturer, Installer, and Testing Agency.

I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

a qualified preconstruction testing agency, for aluminum assemblies, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

J. Field quality-control reports.

K. Maintenance Data: For aluminum assemblies to include in maintenance manuals.

L. Warranties: Sample of special warranties to be issued upon completion of the Project.



VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


A. Unless accepted otherwise by the Engineer, Manufacturer of products in this Part shall be ISO 9001-2000 certified, or higher.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum assemblies that meet or exceed energy performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by certification, labeling, and inclusion in lists.

C. Installer’s Qualification: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained

and approved for installation of units required for this Project, experienced in fabrication and installation of aluminum assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Assumes responsibility for engineering aluminum assembly units to comply

with the requirements of the Project. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation.

2. Professional Engineer Qualification: A Professional Engineer legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services include, but are not limited to, those performed for the complete installation of aluminum assemblies that are similar in material, design, and scope to those indicated for the Project.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except

with Engineer's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data for Architect’s review and Engineer’s approval in writing.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the

following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

G. Energy Performance Standards: Comply with NFRC for minimum standards of energy performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.

H. Source Limitation: For aluminum assemblies; obtain from single source from single manufacturer.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the


2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

J. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with

Owner or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative, Installer and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Part, prior to start of installation. 1. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions and Manufacturer’s


meeting.

9.1.6 Corrosion Protection A. As the climate at the project site is particularly corrosive due to its proximity to

the ocean, the resulting saline atmosphere, the high average temperature, and the intense solar radiation, the Contractor shall make all provisions necessary to propose, subject to prior approval by the Engineer, and if approved, to install non-corroding products and materials including aluminum, stainless steel and plastics for materials exposed to the exterior environment. Where specifically indicated or where no alternative to steel or other oxidizing metal is possible, such materials shall be protected against corrosion by protective coating, galvanization, or by other method necessary and guaranteed for not less than 10 years.


A. Deliver components in the manufacturer's original protective packaging.

B. Store components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or

concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air.



fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work.

9.1.9 Warranty


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the Manufacturer and contractor agreeing to repair or replace components of aluminum works that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond

normal weathering. c. Failure of operating components. d. Glazing breakage. e. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movement. f. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. g. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.

2. Warranty Period: Not less than Ten (10) years from date of Substantial

Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period for Externally-Exposed Finishes: Not less than Fifteen (15)

years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Internally-Exposed Finishes: Not less than Twenty (20)

years from date of Substantial Completion.

9.1.10 Maintenance Service

A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized

tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.

9.2 PRODUCTS

9.2.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with this Specification and other parts of the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

9.2.2 Materials

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and

finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: To ASTM B 209M.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: To ASTM B 221M. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: To ASTM B 429M. 4. Structural Profiles: To ASTM B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: To AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant

primer; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: To ASTM A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: To ASTM A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.


A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing

members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction, for Interior Assemblies: Non-thermal. 2. Construction, for External Assemblies: Thermally-broken. 3. Provide Manufacturer’s standard framing construction that has been in use

for not less than three years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer’s standard high-strength aluminum

with non-staining, non-ferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning

out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Where use of aluminum is not feasible, provide nonmagnetic stainless steel

or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123. 4. Where exposed fasteners are necessary, provide countersunk Philips screw

heads with finish matching framing system.

D. Concrete and Masonty Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements.

E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent material, and of type recommended by Manufacturer.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer’s standard, recommended for joint type indicated.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. Where required, provide Manufacturer’s standard replaceable compressible

weatherstripping gaskets made of extruded EPDM.

G. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 0.4mm dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

9.2.4 Glazing System

A. Glazing: Types and sizes of glasses shall be as specified in Section 25 – Glass and Glazing, of this Specification.

B. Glazing Gaskets, Spacers, Setting Blocks, Sealant Backings, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, non-migrating types compatible with sealants and suitable for joint movement and assembly performance requirements.

9.2.5 Hardware

A. All hardware shall be approved prior to installation.

B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as required or specified for operation of each unit, including the items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required subject to approval.

9.2.6 Aluminum-Framed Entrance Door Assembly

A. Door: Where indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard glazed entrance door for manual-swing operation with extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

1. Door Design: As indicated in the Drawing..

B. Glazing Stops and Gasket: Manufacturer’s standard square-edged, snap-on

extruded aluminum stops and pre-formed gaskets.

C. Entrance Door Hardware: As sheduled in the Drawing, and complying with requirements specified in Section 18, “Door Hardware”, of this Specification.

9.2.7 All-Glass Entrance Door Assembly

A. Door: Frameless glass door; Heat-treated Kind FT (fully-tempered), heat-soak treated and complying with requiremetns of ASTM C 1048, and as follows:

1. Thickness: 12.5mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Color: As per Engineer’s approved sample. 3. Thermal Conductance: Not more than 2.20 W/m²K.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


4. Edges shall be machine ground and flat polished. B. Metal Fittings Components: Provide manufacturer’s standard patch- or rail- fitting

components, as indicated in the Drawing, for all-glass entrance door assembly.

1. Finish: To match adjacent exposed aluminum frames. 2. Profile: Square-edeged, unless indicated otherwise. 3. End Caps: Manufacturer’s standard precision-fit end caps for rail fitting. 4. Glass-support fin brackets, center-housing locks, and other types of

accessory fittings, as required in the door assembly, shall match metal and finish of primary fitting components.

C. Anchor and Fastenings: Concealed-type.

D. Weather Stripping: Pile type; removable without removing all-glass door from

pivot.

E. Entrance Door Hardware: As sheduled in the Drawing, according to requirements specified in Section 18, “Ironmongery”, of this Specification.

9.2.8 Fabrication

A. General: fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members,

and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accomodation for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing

to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to

greatest extent possible.

B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and

grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. 2. Weld in concealed location to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion

or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

3. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site.

4. Preglaze door/window and frame units to greatest extent possible.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


C. Hardware Installation: Factory-install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcement as required for hardware and as necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.

E. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members.

F. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with approved-type corrosion-resistant coating.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory-install entrance door hardware to

the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their location in Project

according to approved Shop Drawings.

9.2.9 Fabrication, All-Glass Entrance Door Assembly

A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering.

1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so

that when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.

B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as required or specified for operation of each

unit, including the items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required subject to approval.


A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard powder coating system especially

formulated to provide required color stability, gloss retention, and corrosion resistance, and meeting or exceeding industry standard indicated.

B. For Internally-Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Standard Powder Coated Finish:

Factory-applied TGIC-free, standard-durability polyester powder coating system. Prepare, treat, and apply on bare clean, corrosion- and contamination-free, mill-finish metal surface according to AAMA 2603 standards and coating manufacturer's written instructions.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. Film Thickness: 60 to 80 microns, or as recommended by coating Manufacturer.

2. Finish and Gloss: As per Engineer’s approved sample from the coating Manufacturer’s full range.

C. For Externally-Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Super Durable Powder Coated




9.3 EXECUTION

9.3.1 Examination

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work.



A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic

action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing non-conductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occuring within

framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and

grades, and without warp or rack. E. Install glazing according to manufacturer’s written instructions, and complying to

requirements indicated in Section 25 – Glass and Glazing, this Specification. F. Entrance Door:

1. Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 2. Install to produce watertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 3. Field-Installed Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door

hardware according to manufacturer’s written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest possible extent.

G. Install perimeter sealants to produce watertight installation.

H. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the

maximum erection tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 3mm in 3.7 meters; 6mm over total length.

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1.5mm. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1mm.

9.3.3 Installation, All-Glass Door Assembly

A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to Manufacturer’s

written instructions.

B. Set units plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.

C. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.

D. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.

E. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated.

F. Install joint sealants according to sealant manufacturer’s written instructions to produce a watertight installatiion.



VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


A. Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to the

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed assemblies with specified requirements.

1. Air Infiltration: Test for air leakage according to ASTM E 783. 2. Water Penetration: Test according to ASTM E 1105. 3. Test areas for air infiltration and water penetration shall be taken on areas

selected by Engineer for a minimum of three tests for each area indicated. Areas to be tested shall be one bay wide by one storey high, minimum.

C. Works tested shall be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

D. Repair or replace work if test results and inspection indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting shall be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

F. Repair installations damaged by testing or replace to conform to specified requirements.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.

B. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds and dirt from surfaces. C. Adjust operable units and hardware to produce smooth operation and tight fit at

contact points and weatherstripping. 1. For entrance door accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to

provide a three-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 75mm from the latch measured to the leading door edge.

9.3.6 Protection

A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the

construction period to ensure that system will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-17-10-1/14 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 17 METALWORKS PART 10 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

10.1 GENERAL

10.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes general requirements for the supply and installation of the following: 1. Hollow metal doors. 2. Hollow metal frames including borrowed light. 3. Louvers. 4. Other related accessories.

10.1.2 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, face, framing and core material descriptions, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Showing the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of door including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints and connections. 7. Glazing detail, if any, including fixing detail to door.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s colour charts showing the full range

of colours available for factory-finished doors and frames. D. Samples for Verification:

1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepare a sample not less than 75 x 125 mm and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of work.

2. Fabrication Sample: For the following items, prepared on Samples about 305 by 305mm to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction: a. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core

construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable.

b. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


3. Samples submitted shall be of the production type and shall represent in all

respects the minimum quality of work to be furnished by the manufacturer. No work represented by the samples shall be fabricated until the samples are approved and any downgrading of quality demonstrated by comparison with the samples may be cause for rejection of the work.

E. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the

supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.

G. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and

exceeding limitations of labelled assemblies. H. Qualification Data: For qualified Manufacturer. I. Warranty: Samples of special warranty.


A. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, Manufacturers shall be ISO

9001:2000 certified or one that employs an equivalent or higher system of quality management.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal door assemblies from single source from a single Manufacturer.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where indicated or required, provide assemblies

conforming with relevant provisions of NFPA 80 “Standard for Doors and Other Opening Protectives”, when tested according to UL 10C “Positive Pressure Fire Test of Fire Door Assemblies”, and that are listed and labeled as such by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Notify Engineer prior to fabrication if fire doors required cannot qualify for labeling due to design, size, hardware or other requirement.

a. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated or required, provide doors that have

a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 250 deg C above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

b. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labelled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.

c. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. d. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, provide certification for units exceeding sizes of tested


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


assemblies, by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labelled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

D. Sound Rating: Where required or indicated, provide door assemblies identical to

those tested as having the specified acoustical rating according to ASTM E 413, when tested per ASTM E 90 by a qualified acoustical testing agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to

comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

F. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with

Employer or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Part. 1. Notify Employer and Engineer 7 days in advance of date and time of meeting.


A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.

B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be

repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Engineer. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum

100-mm high wood blocking. Avoid using non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could Crete a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 6-mm spaces between doors to permit air circulation.



fabrication. Show recorded measurements on stop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work.

B. Coordinate field measurements of acutal opening sizes and fabrication schedule

with construction progress to avoid construction delays.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


10.1.6 Coordination

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. As the climate at the project site is particularly corrosive due to its proximity to the ocean, the resulting saline atmosphere, the high average temperature, and the intense solar radiation, the Contractor shall make all provisions necessary to protect door assemblies by protective coating, galvanization, or by other method necessary and guaranteed for not less than 10 years.

10.1.8 Maintenance and Repair

A. Where possible, Contractor shall engage suppliers of materials, products, and equipments having an office and maintenance service based in Qatar.

10.1.9 Warranty

A. Provide standard warranty, countersigned by Manufacturer and Installer, agreeing to repair or replace of door assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Not less than Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

10.2 PRODUCTS

10.2.1 Manufacturers: Subject to the requirements of this Specification and other parts of the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0 – Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

10.2.2 Materials, General

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;

with minimum G90 (Z275) zinc coating; mill phosphatised and hot-dip galvanized.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 12G coating designation; mill phosphatised.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A

153M.

E. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

F. Grout: To ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 100mm, as measured

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Polyurethane Core: Closed-cell foamed-in polyurethane core filling and chemically bonding the inside of the door panel, and having a density of not less than 24 kg/cu. m.

H. Mineral-Fiber Core: To ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);

consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 96- to 192-kg/cu. m density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Polystyrene Core: Pre-foamed polystyrene slab bonded to inside of door panel

and having a density of not less than 20 kg/cu. m. J. Glazing: As specified in Section 25, Glass and Glazing. K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, to SSPC-Paint 12; provide

non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

L. Paint: Rust-inhibitive prime paint base coat complying with ANSI A 250.10.

10.2.3 Hollow Metal Door

A. General: General: Provide doors of seamless hollow construction unless

otherwise indicated. Construct doors with smooth surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated, and free from wrap or buckle; edge bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radii for thickness of metals used; complying with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

1. Design: [Flush panel] [or] [embossed panel], as indicated in the Drawing. 2. Door Panel Thickness: 44.5mm, minimum. 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated in the Drawing.

B. Exterior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not

less than 1.25 mm thick.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


C. Interior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless galvanized sheet is indicated, not less than 1.0 mm thick.

D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

1. Steel-Stiffened Core: For Entrances, Exits and High-Traffic Doors: Face sheet shall be reinforced by vertical steel stiffeners, formed from 0.8mm thick steel sheet, spaced at not more than 150mm on-center and securely attached to the face sheet by welds not more than 150mm on-center. Spaces between stiffeners shall be filled with manufacturer’s standard fibreglass or mineral fiber insulation the full height of the door. Provide top and bottom channel of 1.5mm steel welded to door skinsat 150mm on centers.

2. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated..

3. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value required when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

4. Sound Control Doors: Where indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard construction having mineral- or glass-fiber internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets, and having minimum acoustic rating as follows: a. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 38 or more.

E. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled 3 mm in 50 mm.

F. Top and Bottom of Door Panel: Shall be closed with continuous channels,

minimum 1.25 mm thick, of same material as, and spot welded to, both face sheets. 1. Unless indicated otherwise, top channel to be flush and bottom channel to be

inverted. G. Glazing and Louvers: Where required or indicated, factory-prepare door for

installation of vision panels and /or louvers. Door manufacturer shall provide the cutouts, steel glazing frames and steel framed louvers.

10.2.4 Hollow Metal Frames

A. General: Fabricate frames of construction indicated. Close contact edges of

corner joints tight with faces mitered and stops butted or mitered. Continuously weld faces and soffits and finish faces smooth. Comply with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

1. Door Frames for Openings 1200mm Wide or Less: Fabricated from 1.5mm

thick steel sheet. 2. Door Frames for Openings More Than 1200mm Wide: Fabricated from

2.0mm thick steel sheet.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


3. Sidelight and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame.

4. Borrowed-Light Frames: Fabricated from 1.25mm thick steel sheet. 5. Fire-Resistance Rating: To match door panel.

B. Exterior Frames: Formed from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet hot-dip galvanized steel

sheet is indicated. D. Head Reinforcement: Provide minimum 2.3mm thick steel channel or angle

stiffener for opening widths more than 1200mm. E. Frame Construction: Knocked Down or Welded. Frames shall be constructed of

1.5mm hot dip galvanized steel sheet to ASTM A 653/A 653M, with the details conforming to the drawings and including anchors suitable to wall construction to which frames are going to be installed. All bends shall be formed with true sharp radii.

1. Knocked Down Frame: Shall include steel corner tabs and corner reinforcing

for field assembly. 2. Welded Frame: Shall be factory assembled, face welded and ground smooth.

3. Transoms, Sidelites and Borrowed Lites: Shall be fabricated from 1.5mm

commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet. Construction, prparation and profile to match masonry frames. All mullion sections to be closed with all joints and corners of the assembly face welded and ground smooth. Provide steel channel glazing for all areas with glass.

4. Fire-Resistance Rating: To match door panel and adjacent wall construction.

. F. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive

three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.

10.2.5 Hardware Preparation

A. Provide steel sheet reinforcement having minimum thickness as follows:

1. Hinge Reinforcement: 4mm. 2. Strike Reinforcement: 3mm. 3. Floor Checking Reinforcement: 4mm.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


4. Closer and Other Hardware Reinforcement: 2mm.

10.2.6 Frame Anchors

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit

frame size, not less than 1.0mm thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 50 mm wide by 250 mm long; or wire anchors not less than 4.5 mm thick.

2. Post-Installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 9.5mm diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 1.0mm thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive

fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension

clips, allowing not less than 50-mm height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

10.2.7 Stops and Mouldings

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.8mm thick, fabricated from same

material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 16 mm high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.8 mm thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

10.2.8 Glazing

A. Glazed Openings: Where indicated, factory-glaze doors with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with Section 25.0 “Glazing” of this Specification.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Where indicated or required, provide wired glass,

laminated or insulated laminated glass with intumescent interlayers for fire-resistance rating required, as specified in Section 25.0-Glazing of this Specification.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


10.2.9 Louvers

A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.5mm thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.8mm thick steel frame.

1. Sight-Proof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or

Y-shaped blades. 2. Fire Rated Automatic Louver: Provide louver manufacturer’s standard

proprietary assembly constructed of operable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating indicated by same testing and inspecting agency that established fire-resistance rating of door assembly.


A. Provide other materials including mullion and transom bar and ceiling struts, not

specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as recommended by the door manufacturer, subject to review and approval by the Engineer.

10.2.11 Fabrication

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where

required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 19 mm beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or

handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and

make smooth, flush, and invisible.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as recommended by door manufacturer.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door

silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door

silencers.

7. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from

either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware manufacturer.

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/NAAMM-

HMMA 861. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-

mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI

A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections. 5. For concealed overhead door closures, provide space, cutouts,

reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.

G. Reinforce doors and frame to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and

tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. H. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where

indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side

of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so

that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of

interior doors and frames.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of

glazing and type of installation indicated.

10.2.12 Steel Finishes

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free

primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

B. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard, complying with ANSI/SDI

A250.3 for performance and acceptance criteria. 1. Color and Gloss: As per Engineer’s approved sample from the

Manufacturer’s full range.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

10.3.2 Preparation

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1.6mm, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1.6mm, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1.6mm, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1.6mm, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

10.3.3 Installation

A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories plumb, rigid, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and the Manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated.

Comply with HMMA 840.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.

d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames

have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are

constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing anti-freezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.

3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal frames for squareness,

alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

b. Squareness: Plus or minus 1.6mm, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


c. Alignment: Plus or minus 1.6mm, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

d. Twist: Plus or minus 1.6mm, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallell lines, and perpendicular to line of wall.

e. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1.6mm, measured at jambs on floor.Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.

4. Masonry Wall: Provide at least three wall anchors per jamb, install adjacent to

hinge location on hinge lamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.

5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout.

Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

6. Existing Concrete or Masonry Wall: Provide at least three completed opening

anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices.

7. Metal Stud Partitions: Provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install

adjacent to hinge location on hinge lamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within

clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jamb and Head: 3mm, plus or minus 1.6mm. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 3mm, plus or minus 1.6mm. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: 9.5mm, maximum. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): 19mm,

maximum.

2. Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 25, Glass and Glazing, and door manufacturer’s written instruction.

1. Secure stops witth countersunk flat-head machine screw spaced uniformly

not more than 200mm on center and not more than 50mm from each corner.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17



A. Final Adjustment: Check and re-adjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or

damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Zinc-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-17-11-1/10 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

SECTION 17 METALWORKS PART 11 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 11.1 GENERAL

11.1.1 Summary

A. This Part specifies the requirements for the supply and installation of the

following:

1. Steel and iron decorative railings.


A. Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings complying with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance, based on testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

B. Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails:

a. Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act

concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 0.22 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093 sq. m.

b. Uniform load of 1.2 kN/sq. m applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide handrails and railings that allow for thermal

movements resulting from the maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg. C, ambient; 100 deg. C, material

surface.

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


11.1.3 Submittals

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's Literature for handrails and railings. 2. Grout, anchoring cement and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings.

Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other Work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design including mechanical finishes, where specified.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails,

top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Welded connections. 4. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components,

including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full height.

E. Welding Certificates.


A. Fabricator: A firm with minimum five years experience in successfully producing

work similar to that indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

B. Installer: An Installer with minimum five years experience in the use of the

materials and equipment to be employed in the Work. Install by same firm which fabricates the Work.

C. Welders: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with

AWS requirements.

1. AWS D1.1 - “Structural Welding Code – Steel”. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single

manufacturer.

E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including, but no limited to, structural analysis and in-service performance.

2. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect,

except with Engineer's approval in writing. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Engineer for review and approval.

F. Mock-ups: Before installing, build mockups to verify selections made under

sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups in location as directed to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed work.

1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of railing, infill

area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 1.5 m in length.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.

11.1.5 Storage

A. Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.




A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field

measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

11.1.8 Coordination

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them.

Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

11.1.9 Scheduling

A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed

walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements.

11.2 PRODUCTS

11.2.1 Metals, General

A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. All steel components shall be hot dip galvanized.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Shall be of same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

11.2.2 Steel and Iron

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type II (expanded and flattened), Class 1 (uncoated).

F. Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, or hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel Type B, 1.52 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Perforation: As per Engineer’s approved sample for perforation size and

pattern required.

G. Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating, commercial steel Type B, 1.63 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Perforation: As per Engineer’s approved sample for perforation size and

pattern required.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


H. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, diamond or square pattern, 50-mm

woven-wire mesh, made from 3.5-mm nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510M.

11.2.3 Fasteners and Anchors

A. Fastener Materials, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard fasteners of type, grade, and class required to suit and match specified railing, produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated, and capable of withstanding design loads. 1. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless otherwise indicated or exposed fasteners are unavoidable.

C. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

11.2.4 Grout and Anchoring Cement

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for indicated applications.

B. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-

controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.

C. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is

resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by Manufacturer for exterior use.



11.2.6 Fabrication

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,

dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field

splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with

fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes. Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and orientations for coordinated installation.

D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease

edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.

G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and

similar items. H. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded or nonwelded connections unless

otherwise indicated. I. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or

use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately.

J. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical

fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive

if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. K. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise

indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.

N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete

or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

O. For railing posts set in concrete, provide suitable sleeves not less than 150 mm long with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.

P. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings

and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.

11.2.7 Finishes, General

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent

pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Where required, provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance,

including color and texture, of railings.

11.2.8 Steel and Iron Finishes

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, pipe and tube railings specified under this Part shall be galvanized and factory-painted.

B. Galvanizing After Fabrication: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply

with applicable standards listed below:

1. For galvanizing railing: To ASTM A 123. 2. For galvaninzing hardware: To ASTM A 153.

C. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to

remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean handrails and

railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreigh matter, and treat with metallic-phosphate process.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


E. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, “Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel”, for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for

priming zinc-coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5.

2. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

F. Factory-Applied Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply paint

manufacturer’s standard two-coat, air-dried enamel or baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and topcoat that complies with ANSI A250.3 acceptance criteria. Comply with paint manufacturer’s instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.03mm for topcoat. For external applications and where indicated, apply Fluropolymer Coating System.

1. Color and Gloss: As per Engineer’s approved sample.

G. Field-Applied Finishes: Refer to Section 26, Painting.

1. Color and Gloss: As per Engineer’s approved sample.

11.3 EXECUTION

11.3.1 Examination

A. Examine plaster and drywall assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to

verify that location of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set

handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.

C. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that

have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

D. Set posts plumb with a tolerance of 2mm in 1 meter.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


F. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but with number of posts not less than that required by structural loads.

G. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

11.3.3 Railing Connections

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing

components.

B. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railing.

C. Expansion Joint: Where required, install expansion joints at locations indicated.

Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 50mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 150mm of post.

11.3.4 Anchoring Posts

A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After

posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non shrink, metallic grout mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of

post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non shrink, non metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with material manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post by weldeing to post

after placing anchoring material or fixing with set screws.

D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces.

11.3.5 Attaching Railings

A. Anchor railing ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to

railing ends and anchored into wall construction with postinstalled anchors and bolts.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


11.3.6 Attaching Handrails to Walls

A. Attach handrails to wall with approved-type bracket, as indicated.

B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support

structural loads.

C. Secure wall bracket and railing end flanges to building construction.

11.3.7 Cleaning

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

11.3.8 Protection

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no

evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-17-12-1/9 METAL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

SECTION 17 METALWORKS PART 12 METAL PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 12.1 GENERAL

12.1.1 Summary

A. This Part specifies the requirements for the supply and installation of the

following:

1. Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube Railing


A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings complying with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance, based on testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

B. Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails:

a. Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act

concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 0.22 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093 sq. m.

b. Uniform load of 1.2 kN/sq. m applied horizontally. c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide handrails and railings that allow for thermal

movements resulting from the maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg. C, ambient; 100 deg. C, material

surface. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by

insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


12.1.3 Submittals

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's Literature for handrails and railings. 2. Grout, anchoring cement and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings.

Include plans, elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other Work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components indicated below and of same thickness and metal indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.

1. 150-mm- long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member,

including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. 3. Connections. 4. Assembled sample of railings, made from full-size components including top

rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections.

E. Welding Certificates.


A. Fabricator: A firm with minimum five years experience in successfully producing

work similar to that indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

B. Installer: An Installer with minimum five years experience in the use of the

materials and equipment to be employed in the Work. Install by same firm which fabricates the Work.

C. Welders: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with

AWS requirements.

1. AWS D1.1 - “Structural Welding Code – Steel”. 2. AWS D1.6 - “Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel”.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single

manufacturer.

E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including, but no limited to, structural analysis and in-service performance.


except with Engineer's approval in writing. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Engineer for review and approval.

F. Mock-ups: Before installing, build mockups to verify selections made under

sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups in location as directed to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed work.

1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of railing, infill

area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 1.5 m in length.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at


12.1.5 Storage

A. Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.




A. Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field

measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

12.1.8 Coordination

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them.

Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

12.1.9 Scheduling

A. Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed

walls. Do not support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements.

12.2 PRODUCTS

12.2.1 Metals, General

A. General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. All steel components shall be hot dip galvanized.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Shall be of same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

12.2.2 Stainless Steel Railing

A. Pipe: To ASTM A 312; Austenitic Grade 316, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Tubing: To ASTM A 554; Austenitic Grade 316, unless indicated otherwise. C. Plate and Sheet: To ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666; Austenitic Type 316, unless

indicated otherwise.

12.2.3 Welding Materials, Fasteners and Anchors

A. General: Provide the following:

1. For Stainless Steel Railing: Provide type 316 stainless steel fasteners, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners fabricated

from same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting handrail and railing

components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless

otherwise indicated.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


C. Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

D. Anchors: Expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete.

E. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and

electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

12.2.4 Grout and Anchoring Cement

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for indicated applications.

B. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-

controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.

C. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated, provide

formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by Manufacturer for exterior use.



12.2.6 Fabrication

A. General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated

for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to

minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burns and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1mm, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner. Provide

weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and railing members that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and

similar items. G. Welded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings for connecting members

by welding. Cope components at perpendicular and skew connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld connections continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

H. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical

fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and

railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

K. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel not less than 150

mm long with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, and steel plate forming bottom closure.

L. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed

cut edges. M. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise

indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


N. Close exposed ends of handrail and railing members with prefabricated end

fittings. O. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise

indicated. Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of railing and wall is 6 mm or less.

12.2.7 Finishes, General

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and

texture, of handrails and railings.

12.2.8 Stainless Steel Finishes

A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally tectured, polish finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

1. Provide for directional satin finish, unless otherwise indicated.

C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

12.3 EXECUTION

12.3.1 Examination

A. Examine plaster and drywall assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that location of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.

C. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrail and railing components that

have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

D. Set posts plumb with a tolerance of 2mm in 1 meter. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surface of aluminum that will be in contact

with grout, concrete masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

G. Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at

abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated, but with number of posts not less than that required by structural loads.

H. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

12.3.3 Railing Connections

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing

components.

B. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railing.

C. Expansion Joint: Where required, install expansion joints at locations indicated.

Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 50mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 150mm of post.

12.3.4 Anchoring Posts

A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After

posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non shrink, metallic grout mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of

post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non shrink, non metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with material manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post by weldeing to post

after placing anchoring material or fixing with set screws.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as

required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For stainless steel pipe railing, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting

surfaces.

12.3.5 Attaching Railings

A. Anchor railing ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored into wall construction with postinstalled anchors and bolts.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends.

12.3.6 Attaching Handrails to Walls

A. Attach handrails to wall with approved-type bracket, as indicated.

B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support

structural loads.

C. Secure wall bracket and railing end flanges to building construction.

12.3.7 Cleaning

A. Clean stainless steel surface by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.

12.3.8 Protection

A. Protect finishes of handrails and railings from damage during construction period

with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at the time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-17-13-1/10 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHT

SECTION 17 METALWORKS PART 13 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHT 13.1 GENERAL

13.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes the supply and installation a complete metal-framed skylight

system including the following:

1. Aluminum frames. 2. Sills, retainers, gutters, and flashings. 3. Gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants. 4. Skylight glazing. 5. Glazing accessories.

B. This specification in conjunction with the architectural drawings define the scope

of works, the mandatory geometry of all visible façade elements and surfaces, the performance parameters and the minimum acceptable standards applicable to the skylight sysyem. The Contractor can develop the indicative solution provided in the Contract Document or produce their own design which they deem necessary or required, subject to compliance with the requirements of this Specification, the Architectural design intent, and Engineer’s/Architect’s approval

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the engineering design, testing, procurement, fabrication, installation, certification, protection and maintenance up to the defects liabillity period, of the complete skylight system including its interaction with the main structure and its services components, and other contiguous cladding systems.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all relevant data including the full extent and detailing of the Works specified in this Part, and make all necessary monetary and time allowances to ensure the proper and complete installation of the skylight system upon completion of the Project

E. This specification shall be taken as a single contract for the Works specified in this Part and shall not be sub-divided into multi-trade packages

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying any discrepancies that might exist in the Drawings and the Specifications, or any inconsistencies and contradictions between the specified performance requirements of the skylight system and other construction including, but not limited to, concrete and masonry works and HVAC system. Any discrepancies which may affect the mechanical, thermal and acoustic performance of the skylight system, and the building envelope in general, must be brought to the attention of the Engineer by the Contractor for clarification before the commencement of any fabrication.

13.1.2 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metal-framed skylights.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


B. Shop Drawings: For metal-framed skylights. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for

draining moisture within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of

assembly, showing the following: a. Joinery including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.


D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in

manufacturer's standard sizes. G. Fabrication Sample: Of each framing intersection of assemblies, made from

300mm lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

H. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-framed skylights indicated to comply with


I. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. J. Pre-construction Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing

agency. K. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

a qualified testing agency, for metal-framed skylights. L. Field quality-control reports. M. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.




VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


B. Installer’s Qualification: Engage a highly-experienced Installer trained, authorized

and certified in writing by the Manufacturer for the installation of their product, having a record of successful in-service performance in previous Projects, and eligible to receive manufacturer’s special warranty.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing

indicated. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes

requirements for skylights' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including testing conducted by an independent testing agency and in-service performance.


except with Architect or Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Engineer for review.

E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

F. Provide metal-framed skylights that comply with test-performance requirements

indicated, as evidenced by reports based on Project-specific preconstruction testing by a qualified independent testing agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Preconstruction Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups of assemblies. 2. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility using personnel, materials,

and methods of construction that will be used at Project site. 3. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of the dates and times when

laboratory mockups will be constructed. 4. Preconstruction Testing Sequence: Test laboratory mockups according to

AAMA 501 minimum requirements. G. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with

Owner or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative, Installer and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Part, prior to start of installation of skylight system.

1. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions and Manufacturer’s




VOLUME 2 SECTION 17




A. Where possible, Contractor shall engage suppliers of materials, products, and equipments having an office and maintenance service based in Qatar.

13.1.6 Warranty

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal-framed skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage.

2. Warranty Period: Not less than Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Warranty Period: Not leaa than Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial

Completion.

13.2 PRODUCTS

13.2.1 Manufacturers: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with this Specification and other parts of the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.



VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


A. General: Metal-framed skylights shall withstand the effects of the following without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements 3. Movements of supporting structure. 4. Dimensional tolerances of support system and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by

thermal and structural movements to glazing.

d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.

e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

f. Sealant failure.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal-framed skylights, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Wind Load: Provide systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever is more stringent. 1. Design to a basic wind speed of 162 km/hr. (45 m/sec.).

D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Glazing Plane: Limit to edge of glass in a direction

perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 19 mm, whichever is less.


E. Lateral Bracing of Framing Members: Compression flanges of flexural members

are laterally braced by cross members with minimum depth equal to 50 percent of flexural member that is braced. Glazing does not provide lateral support.

F. Structural-Test Performance: Provide metal-framed skylights tested according to ASTM E 330, as follows:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17





G. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage

through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.03 L/s per sq. m of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 300 Pa.

H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 480 Pa.

I. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material

surfaces.

J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

K. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having average thermal conductance (U-vaue) indicated when tested according to AAMA 1503: 1. U-value: Not more than 1.80 W/m²K, unless indicated otherwise.


A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: To ASTM B 209M. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: To ASTM B 221M 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: To ASTM B 429/B 429M. 4. Structural Profiles: To ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: To AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning skylight components.

D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning

out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Where rerquired, use corrosion-resistant fasteners with countersunk Phillips

screw heads, finished to match framing system.

E. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

F. Anchor Bolts: To ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6, galvanized steel.

G. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials, and of type recommended in writing by manufacturer.

H. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components not less than 1.0mm thick.

I. Framing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.

J. Framing Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer, and specified in Section 24-Joint Sealants, of this Specification.

K. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 0.4mm dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

13.2.4 Glazing

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 25-Glass and Glazing, of this Specification.

B. Spacers, Setting Blocks, and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.

C. Gaskets:

1. Compression type design, replaceable, molded or extruded silicone, neoprene, or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM).

2. Comply with ASTM C 509 or C 864.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


3. Profile and hardness as necessary to maintain uniform pressure for watertight seal.

4. Manufacturer's standard black color. 5. Factory molded corners required at interior.

D. Setting Blocks, Edge Blocks, and Spacers: As recommended by Manufacturer

and compatible with insulated glass.

E. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard tetrafluoroethylene-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

F. Glazing Sealants: As recommended in writing by manufacturer, and specified in

Section 24-Joint Sealants, of this Specification.

13.2.5 Fabrication

A. Where practical, fit and assemble metal-framed skylights in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Fabricate aluminum components before finishing.

C. Fabricate aluminum components that, when assembled, have the following

characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints,

condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within skylight to exterior.

4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and

framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances.

D. Fabricate aluminum sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous component.

E. Reinforce aluminum components as required to receive fastener threads.

F. Weld aluminum components in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

G. Factory-install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 26-Glazing, of this

Specification.

H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to approved shop drawings.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17



A. General: Provide coating manufacturer’s standard system especially formulated to provide required color stability, gloss retention, and corrosion resistance, and meeting or exceeding industry standard indicated.

B. For Internally-Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Standard Powder Coated Finish: Factory-applied TGIC-free, standard-durability polyester powder coating system. Prepare, treat, and apply on bare clean, corrosion- and contamination-free, mill-finish metal surface according to AAMA 2603 standards and coating manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Film Thickness: 60 to 80 microns, or as recommended by coating


Manufacturer’s full range. C. For Externally-Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Super Durable Powder Coated




13.3 EXECUTION

13.3.1 Examination

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

13.3.2 Installation

A. General: Install skylight system in accordance with approved shop drawings and Manufacturer's instructions.

1. Do not install damaged components. 2. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of

burrs and distortion.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 17


3. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 4. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 5. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or

discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar materials, protect

against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with protective coating or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose.

C. Provide attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building

structure. D. Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion

and contraction. E. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within

framing members, and moisture migrating within skylight to exterior. F. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and

elevations.

G. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 26-Glazing, of this Specification.

H. Erection Tolerances: Install metal-framed skylights to comply with the maximum

tolerances recommended in wrtiting by Manufacturer.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, skylights

shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

2. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105.

B. Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF PART


VOLUME 02 SECTION 18

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-18-00-1/1

SECTION 18 CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY

This Section specifies materials, accessories and workmanship for the use of wood in building construction. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Works as indicated herein, including all other incidental works as may be necessary or required for the completion of the project, shall comply with Section 18 and other relevant sections of QCS-2007.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-18-08-1/9 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 18 CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY PART 8 ROUGH CARPENTRY 8.1 GENERAL

8.1.1 Summary


1. MDF panels. 2. Wood blocking, grounds and nailers. 3. Wood furring. 4. Sheathing. 5. Plywood backing panels. 6. Wood sub-frames.

8.1.2 Related Parts A. Section 18.0- Architectural Woodwork, Timber Doors B. Section 26.0 – Painting and Decorating C. Section 24 - Finishes

8.1.3 Definitions

A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated.

8.1.4 Performance Requirement

A. Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated:

1. International Building Code (IBC) 2003 and related codes and specifications

as noted in the Contract Document. 2. Qatar Specification-2007, Section 18.

8.1.5 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. MDF panels. 2. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


3. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

5. Where required by the Engineer, include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with

building code in effect for Project:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors.


A. Unless accepted otherwise by the Engineer, use Manufacturers and that employ a Quality Management System complying with the program described in ISO 9001-2000, or similar system.

B. Quality System: Comply with ISO 9001/9002 Quality System as a minimum.

C. Incorporate all the standard procedures supplied by the Engineer and the

Employer.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

E. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of

engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.

F. Source Limitations for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire-retardant-treated wood product through one source from a single producer.


A. Where possible the Contractor is to use suppliers of materials, products and equipment from companies having an office and maintenance service based in Qatar.

8.1.8 Work Reasonably Inferred


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


A. Contractor shall execute the Work in accordance with the intent and meaning of the Drawings and Specification and shall supply all accessories and other items essential for the proper Performance and Completion of the Work and shall execute all Work, including the supply of necessary materials, which can be reasonably inferred, whether or not specifically shown or described in the Drawings and Specification.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

8.2 PRODUCTS 8.2.1 Wood Products, General

A. Wood products shall comply with QCS-2007, Section 18 or relevant provisions of BS 1186.

B. In lieu of BS standard reference for lumber, comply with DOC PS 20 and

applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark

grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS

20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of

dressing for 38-mm actual thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of

dressing for 38-mm actual thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 8.2.2 Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials

A. Comply with Section 18, Part 2 of QCS-2007.

B. In lieu of BS standard reference, comply with AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one

of the following:

a. Chromated copper arsenate (CCA).


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


b. Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA). c. Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ). d. Copper bis (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). e. Ammoniacal copper citrate (CC). f. Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A). g. Oxine copper (copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent.

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use

chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for

lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency

approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.

8.2.3 Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials

A. General: Treatment shall comply with Section 18, Part 2 of QCS-2007 and BS 476.

B. In lieu of relevant BS standard reference: Provide materials that comply with

performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. and European Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties

of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood.

2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated.

C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

D. Use fire retardant materials for all concealed rough carpentry work.

E. Use fire retardant materials for all exposed rough carpentry work unless


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer.

8.2.4 Timber

A. Hardwood and Soft wood shall comply with Section 18, Part 1 of QCS-2007 or relevant provisions of BS 1186, Part 1.

1. Approved hardwood are the following:

a. Iroko b. Afrormosia c. Dark Red Meranti d. Opepe

B. Under no circumstances shall Light Red Meranti shall be used.

C. Where Teak is specified no alternative hardwood will be acceptable.

D. Quality of timber shall comply with the requirements of Tables 1.1 and 1.2 under

Section 18, Part 1 of QCS-2007. 8.2.5 Fiber Board Panels

A. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF) Panels: To ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.

8.2.6 Miscellaneous Lumber

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. 4. Grounds.

B. For concealed and exposed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum

moisture content and any of the approved species and grades.

C. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

8.2.7 Sheathing (As Applicable)

A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.

1. Span Rating and Thickness: According to application.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


B. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 79/C 79M, with water-resistant material incorporated into the core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and long edges.

1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 13 mm or Type X, 15.9 mm thick according to

type of application. 2. Edge and End Configuration: V-shaped, tongue-and-groove long edges;

square ends. 3. Size: According to application.

8.2.8 Plywood Backing Panels

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 12.7 mm thick.

8.2.9 Wood Door Sub-Frames

A. Minimum 25 mm thick softwood, machine sanded. 8.2.10 Fasteners

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of

high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M, except for expansion bolts to be as specified in Sub-Clause H of this Clause.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: BS 1202, Part 1 or ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: BS 1210 or ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with

wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property

Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below

with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).


A. Sheathing Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing and recommended by sheathing manufacturer for use with type of sheathing required.

B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 6.4 mm thick, selected from

manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

C. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Synthetic resin complying with BS 1204 Parts 1 & 2, Type WBP or Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers.

D. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and-accepted formulation

containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

8.3 EXECUTION 8.3.1 Installation, General

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces

that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative

treated lumber and plywood.

D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.

E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that

will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail

heads and fill holes with wood filler. 8.3.2 Wood Ground, Blocking and Nailer Installation

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts

flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-

beveled lumber not less than 38 mm wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

8.3.3 Wood Furring Installation

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level and at ceiling, with wood

blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

C. Unless higher sizes or smaller intervals are indicated on Drawings, use furring sizes and intervals as follows:

1. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 19-by-63-mm

actual size furring horizontally and vertically at 600 mm o.c. 2. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 19-by-38-mm actual size furring

vertically at 400 mm o.c. 3. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Install 19-by-38-mm actual size furring

vertically at 400 mm o.c.

8.3.4 Gypsum Sheathing

A. General: Fasten gypsum sheathing to supports with galvanized roofing nails; comply with GA-253 and manufacturer's recommended spacing and referenced fastening schedule. Keep perimeter fasteners 9.5 mm from edges and ends of units.

B. Install 600mm x 2400mm sheathing horizontally with long edges at right angles

to studs with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent board without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing, two where possible.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


C. Install 1200mm x 2400mm and longer sheathing vertically with long edges

parallel to, and centered over, studs. Install solid wood blocking where end joints do not occur over framing. Fit units tightly against each other.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-18-09-1/14 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

SECTION 18 CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY PART 9 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 9.1 GENERAL

9.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes general requirements for the supply and complete installation

of all requirements for Interior Architectural Woodworks, as indicated in the drawings including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Interior Trims. 2. Interior Frames and Jambs. 3. Flush Wood Paneling. 4. Wood Cabinets. 5. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets. 6. Plastic-Laminate Countertops.

B. This Part includes all required fixtures, anchors, adhesives and related

accessories including furring, blocking, shims and hanging strips for hanging woodwork items, where required or indicated. Contractor shall provide all miscellaneous metal, which is shown on or implied by the drawings and required for the work.

9.1.2 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product and process specified and incorporated

into items of woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation including the following:

1. Cabinet hardware and accessories. 2. Adhesive for bonding plastic laminate. 3. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations,

large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for fixtures and other

accessory items installed in the Works for this Part. 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and

identification numbers indicating the panel and sequence within the panel for each leaf.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


C. Samples for Initial Selection: Provide 3 samples, minimum of 300 sq. m., for each of the following:

1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Shop-applied opaque finishes. 3. Plastic laminates. 4. PVC edge material. 5. Thermoset decorative panels.

D. Samples for Verification: Provide 3 samples, minimum of 300mm x 300mm, for

each of the following:

1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 300 sq. cm, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.

2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from panels to be used for transparent-finished woodwork.

3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 300 by 600 mm, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.

4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 300 sq. cm for lumber and 200 by 250 mm for panels, for each finish system and color, with exposed surface finished.

5. Plastic laminates, 200 by 250 mm, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.

6. Thermoset decorative-panels, 200 by 250 mm, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.

7. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed

end pieces, 450 mm high by 450 mm wide by 150 mm deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim.

8. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance"

article evidencing compliance to required capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects/Engineers and Employers, and other relevant information.

F. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.


A. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, Manufacturer/Fabricator and Installer of products in this Part shall be ISO 9001-2000 certified, or higher.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades, construction, finishes, and workmanship of interior architectural woodwork:

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm with minimum ten years experience in producing

Works similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer with minimum 10 years

experience who has completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided

responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.

1. Provide transparent-finished timber doors that are required to be of same

species as woodwork. 2. Provide timber doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with

woodwork. F. Mockups: Before fabricating and installing architectural woodwork, build mockups

for each form of construction and finish required as directed to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion subject to approval by Engineer.

G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where required or indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on materials surfaces that will be concealed to view after installation. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Shall not exceed values indicated below,

when subjected to accelerated weathering test ASTM D 2898 and then tested per ASTM E 84 for 20 minutes with no evidence of significant combustion. In addition, the flame front shall not progress more than 3.2 meters beyond the center of the burner at any time during the test. a. Flame Spread: 25 b. Smoke Developed: 450


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


H. Mockup: Where required by the Engineer and prior to final fabrication and installation of interior architectural woodwork, build mockups to verify selection made under sample submittals demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at


I. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct coordination meeting at the Project site with Owner or his representative, Engineer, Manufacturer’s representative, Installer and other construction discipline in the project whose work interfaces with or affects the Works required in this Part, prior to start of installation. 1. Verify project requirements, substrate conditions and Manufacturer’s


meeting.

9.1.4 Work Reasonably Inferred

A. Contractor shall execute the Work in accordance with the intent and meaning of the Drawings and Specification and shall supply all accessories and other items essential for the proper Performance and Completion of the Work and shall execute all Work, including the supply of necessary materials, which can be reasonably inferred, whether or not specifically shown or described in the Drawings and Specification.


A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.

B. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

C. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage

wood work have been completed in installation areas.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through the remainder of construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other

construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


shop drawings. Co-ordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Works.

1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that

support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate masurements on final Shop Drawings.

9.1.7 Coordination

A. Co-ordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other

related units of Work specified in other Parts of this Specification to ensure that woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

B. Hardware Coordination: Coordinate hardware requirements, as specified in the approved Hardware Schedule, with approved Shop Drawings.

9.2 PRODUCTS

9.2.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with this Specification and other parts of

the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

9.2.2 Materials

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) quality standards for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise specified..

B. Wood, General:

1. Timber shall be properly seasoned and planed square, straight and true. 2. Provide materials that are free from the following:

a. Sapwood, splits, ring shakes and soft pit. b. Checks and knots. c. Decay and insect attack, including pinworm holes.

3. Timber shall be kiln-dried to maximum moisture content of 8 percent. 4. Wood Species and Finish: As indicated in the Drawings. 5. Finish solid wood and wood veneer to match approved sample.

C. Solid Wood: AWI standard; comply with Section 100 lumber grading rules.

1. Hardwood for Transparent Finish: Grade I, unless otherwise noted. Species

and cut as indicated in the Drawing or other parts of the Contract Document.

D. Wood Face Veneer: AWI standard; comply with Section 200 lumber grading rules.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


1. Wood Veneer for Transparent Finish: Grade AA, unless otherwise noted. Species and cut as indicated in the Drawing or other parts of the Contract Document.

E. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Hardboard: To AHA A135.4. 2. Particleboard: To ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, with no binder containing urea

formaldehyde unless otherwise specified for fire-retardant type. 3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: To ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with no binder

containing urea formaldehyde. a. Density Rate: 785 kg/cu.m., min.

4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): To HPVA HP-1, made

with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. 5. Softwood Plywood: To DOC PS 1. Plywood shall be veneer-core type. Use of

wood-strip-core plywood shall be subject to Engineer’s approval.

F. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard thermally-fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on

components with exposed or semiexposed edges.

G. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: To NEMA LD 3, grade as indicated, unless otherwise indicated by woodwork quality standard.

1. Where indicated for chemical resistance, provide high-pressure decorative

laminate complying to NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP.

9.2.3 Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials

A. General: Where indicated or required, use materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical formulations by pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to produce wood products with the fire-test-response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated material that does not comply with requirements of

referenced woodworking standards ot that is warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated from the untreated materials.

B. Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with

AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood), and using either of the following:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


1. Use either of the following type of formulation:

a. Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. b. Low-hygroscopic formulation.

2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during

treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

3. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements,

made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84 1. For panels 19 mm thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2

except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 11 MPa; modulus of elasticity, 2070 MPa; internal bond, 550 kPa; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 1100 and 1000 N, respectively.

2. For panels 20 to 32 mm thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 9 MPa; modulus of elasticity, 1720 MPa; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 1100 and 780 N, respectively

D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with

ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

9.2.4 Wood-Preservative-Treated Materials

A. Where required or specified, protect wood material or product with an organic solvent water repellent wood preservative to give a highly efficient protection against termite, spider, worm, all insect and fungus and rot attack and shall, where exposed, enhance the appearance of the timber. Colour of the product shall be such as to bring out the natural colour of the respective timbers. The preservative shall penetrate deeply into the timbers, shall protect against blue stain, rot, fungus, and termite, spider, worm and all insect attack and shall contain a resin which fixes the preserving agent and protects them against leaching and evaporation.

1. Extent of Treatment: Treat blocking and nailers by pressure process and

treat other exterior woodwork either by pressure or nonpressure process regardless of species from which it is fabricated.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


9.2.5 Cabinet Hardware and Accessories

A. General: Provide heavy-duty hardware for the smooth functioning of the drawers and cabinet doors including concealed adjustable hinges, pulls, catches, grommets, locks and rubber bumpers, where indicated or as necessary to complete the work. Finish as per drawings.

B. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide from one of the following finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base;

BHMA 640 for steel base; match Architect's sample. 2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass base; BHMA 632 for steel

base 3. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass

base; BHMA 636 for steel base. 4. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for

steel base. 5. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for

steel base. 6. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

C. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Fasteners: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material,

and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.

C. Adhesives: To B.S 1204. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for

secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.


A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete

and proper installation of interior architectural woodworks, subject to review and approval by the Engineer.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


9.2.8 Fabrication, General

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade

interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality

standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges

to 1.5mm radius including corners of cabinets and edges of solid-wood (lumber) members.

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Trial fit assemblies that cannot be shipped completely assembled at

fabrication shop. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances,

plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

G. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.

H. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or thickness

I. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.

J. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant

and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.

9.2.9 Interior Standing and Running Trims

A. Wood Species and Cut: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


1. Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species,

matching each face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.

B. Finish: As indicated in the Drawing.

C. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not

glue for width.

D. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or thickness.

E. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.

F. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.

9.2.10 Interior Frames and Jambs

A. Wood Species and Cut: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.

B. Finish: As indicated in the Drawing.

C. For frames or jambs wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.

D. Fire-Rated Interior Frames and Jambs: Where required, provide products fabricated from fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard with veneered, exposed surfaces and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Fire Rating: As indicated in the Drawing.

9.2.11 Flush Wood Panelings

A. Wood Species and Cut: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing. 1. Lumber Trim and Edges: At fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as

solid wood (except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction compatible with grain and color of veneered panels.

B. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book- or slip-match, unless otherwise specified.

C. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


D. Panel-Matching Method: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.

E. Vertical Panel-Matching Method: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.

F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Paneling: Provide panels consisting of wood veneer and

fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard. Panels shall have flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84.

9.2.12 Interior Ornamental Work

A. Interior ornamental work for transparent finish includes the following 1. Columns. 2. Lattice.

B. Wood Species and Cut: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.

9.2.13 Wood Cabinets

A. Cabinet Face Construction: Flush overlay, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Cabinet Frame Construction: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.

C. Grain Direction: Unless otherwise specified, shall be vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

D. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Book- or slip-match, unless otherwise specified.

E. Panel-Matching Method: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.

F. Vertical Panel-Matching Method: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.

G. Wood Species and Cut: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.

9.2.14 Plastic-Laminate Cabinets

A. Cabinet Face Construction: Flush overlay, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cabinet Frame Construction: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing.

C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: 1.2mm thick, min. 2. Postformed Surfaces: 1mm thick, min. 3. Vertical Surfaces: 1mm thick, min.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


4. Edges: Unless otherwise specificed, shall be PVC edge banding, 3 mm thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

D. Provide manufacturer’s standard materials for semi-exposed cabinet surfaces

including back, siding and bottom panels, shelf edges; of type, thickness and texture required for type of application indicated.

E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As per Engineer’s approved samples.

9.2.15 Plastic-Laminate Countertops

A. Shall be of high-pressure decorative laminate; not less than 1.2mm thick, and as follows: 1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As per Engineer’s approved sample. 2. Edge Treatment: As indicated in the approved Shop Drawing. 3. Core Material: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard, unless otherwise

specified. 4. Core Material at Wet Areas: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard

made with exterior glue.

9.2.16 Finishing

A. Grade: Premium, unless otherwise indicated.

B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop to the greatest extent possible, and as specified in this Part. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

C. Field-priming and finishing, where required, shall comply with referenced quality standard and shall be as specified in Section 26-Painting and Decorating, of this Specification.

D. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.

E. Color, Texture and Gloss: As per Engineer’s approved sample.

9.3 EXECUTION

9.3.1 Preparation

A. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for

completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

B. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


C. Before installing the work, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and

complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.


A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.

B. Install work plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use

concealed shims where required for alignment.

1. Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Countersink nails, fill surface flush, and sand where face nailing is unavoidable.

C. Screwing:

1. All screws shall have clearance holes. 2. Screws of 3-mm diameter or more and all screws into hardwood shall have

piolet holes.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated

wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.

F. Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled holes.

G. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

H. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces from maximum length of lumber available to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 1800mm long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand

smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished. 2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line

than 3 mm in 2400 mm.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


I. Paneling: Unless otherwise specified, anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face fastening, unless covered by trim. 1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1.5 mm in 2400-mm vertical cup or

bow and 3 mm in 2400-mm horizontal variation from a true plane.

J. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 3 mm in 2400-mm sag, bow, or other

variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.

K. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base

cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to

comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 3 mm in 2400-mm sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 400 mm o.c. and to walls with adhesive, unless otherwise specified.

4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant type specified in Section 24-Joint Sealants, of this Specifiection.

L. Touch up finishing work specified in this Part after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.


A. Repair damaged or defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional or

visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-

applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

9.3.4 Protection

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-18-10-1/10 TIMBER FLUSH DOORS

SECTION 18 CARPENTRY, JOINERY, & IRONMONGERY

PART 10 TIMBER FLUSH DOORS 10.1 GENERAL 10.1.1 Summary


1. Solid Core Timber Doors 2. Fire-Rated Timber Doors. 3. Light Openings. 4. Door Frames.


A. Section 18.0 - Rough Carpentry B. Section 18.0 – Architectural Woodwork C. Section 25.0 - Glass and Glazing

D. Section 26.0 - Painting & Decorating

10.1.3 Referenced Codes

A. ANSI A208.1 - Standard for Particleboard. B. ASTM D 1761 - Screw Withdrawal Test Method.

C. ASTM D 5456 - Standard Specification for Evaluation of Structural Composite

Lumber Products.

D. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.

E. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

F. ASTM E 1332 - Standard Classification for Determination of Outdoor-Indoor

Transmission Class.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


G. ASTM E 2235 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Decay Rates for Use in Sound Insulation Test Methods.

H. NFPA 80 - NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

I. NFPA 252- Standard Method of Fire Test for Door Assemblies.

J. International Standards Organization (ISO): ISO 9001-2000

K. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Test of Door Assemblies.

L. UL 10C- Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies.

10.1.4 Definitions

A. Fire-Resisting Door: A door which has been constructed in such a manner that when installed in an assmbly and tested, shall pass ASTM E 152 and NFPA 80, and can be rated as fire-resisting for a specified time duration, and carry the label of an approved independent testing and inspecting agency confirming its fire rating.

B. Smoke door: A fire-resisting door which, in addition to having intumescent seals

to seal hot smoke, also has approved quality draught seals to seal cold smoke, installed in accordance with NFPA 105, “Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies”. A smoke door shall be tested and labeled by an approved independent testing and inspecting agency, confirming its rating.


A. Comply with the following requirements, unless indicated otherwise:

1. Fire-Resisting Door and Assemblies: Provide fire-resisting doors, shutters,

grilles, screens, and panels, together with other related component assemblies testedd and labeled by an independent testing and inspecting agency or laboratory, confirming their fire–resistance rating.

a. Rating of all door components shall be equal to the rating of the door

assembly. b. All fire-resistance rated door shall be fitted with automatic door closers

that positively latch the door.

2. Fire-Resisting Door Enclosures: The space between a fire-resisting door assembly and the structural soffit above shall be closed by a wall or partition panel with fire-resistance rating equal to or exceeding that of the door.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


3. Acoustic Doors: Where required or indicated provide doors complete with related component assembly that have been tested and labeled by an approved independent testing and inspecting agency as having met or exceeded required sound insulation level, as evidenced by testing per ASTM E 90 for interior doors and ASTM E 1332 for exterior doors.

10.1.6 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, and trim for openings.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 4. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 5. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic-laminate door faces and factory-finished

doors.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Wood Veneer Finish: 200 x 250mm; for each color, texture, and pattern indicated.

2. Plastic Laminate Finish: 200 x 250mm; for each color, texture, and pattern indicated.

3. Frame for Glazed Openings: 150mm long, for each material, type, and finish required.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of door, from Manufacturer.

F. Warranty: Sample of standard warranty to be issued upon completion of Project.



B. Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Provide doors that comply with AWI and WDMA 1.S. 1A. C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where indicated or required, provide assemblies

conforming with relevant provisions of NFPA 80 “Standard for Doors and Other


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


Opening Protectives”, when tested according to UL 10C “Positive Pressure Fire Test of Fire Door Assemblies”, and that are listed and labeled as such by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Notify Engineer prior to fabrication if fire doors required cannot qualify for labeling due to design, size, hardware or other requirement.

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested

assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labelled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.

3. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated for vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 250 deg C above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain door units from one source from a single

manufacturer to ensure uniformity in quality of appearance, face veneer, finish and construction.

E. Safety Glass: Provide Category II materials complying with testing requirements in relevant British Standards, and as follows:

1. Whether or not specified in the Drawing or other parts of the Contract

Document, provide safety glazing where required or where risk of impact or falling glass is likely, as determined according to BS 6262 Part 4, “Glazing for Building Safety Related to Human Impact”.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another qualified certification agency acceptable to the Engineer and to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Where possible, engage suppliers and manufacturers of materials, products and

equipments specified for the Project from companies having an office and maintenance service based in Qatar.

10.1.9 Storage and Handling

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Inspect for damage.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


B. Storage and Protection: Comply with door manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with numbering schedule used on

approved Shop Drawing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

10.1.11 Warranty

A. Provide standard warranty, countersigned by Manufacturer and Installer, for repair or replacement of doors that fail in materials or workmanship within a specified warranty period.


a. Warping (bow,cup or twist) more than 6mm in a 1000mm x 2000mm

section. b. Exposure of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.25mm in a

75mm span.

2. Warranty shall include installation and finishing works that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Interior Doors: Not less than Five (5) years after the date of Substantial Completion.

4. Warranty Period for Insulated Glass Vision Panel: Not less than Ten (10) years after the date of Substantial Completion.

10.2 PRODUCTS 10.2.1 Manufacturers: Subject to the requirements of this Specification and other parts

of the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

10.2.2 Door Construction, General

A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other

requirements specified. 1. Size, layout and thickness shall be as specified in the Drawings.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


2. Unless indicated otherwise, provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins.

B. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: To ANSI A208.1, made with binder containing no urea-

formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Unless indicated otherwise, provide wood blocking in particleboard-

core doors where required to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: To WDMA I.S.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 3100N. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 1780N.

D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors (Where Indicated): Provide particleboard- or

mineral-core complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 1. Edge Construction: Laminated-edge construction with improved screw-

holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

10.2.3 Timber Flush Door, General

A. Panel Designs: As indicated in the Drawings


except with Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Engineer for review.

B. Size, layout and thickness shall be as specified in the Drawings.

10.2.4 Veneered-Face Doors for Transparent Finish

A. Solid-Core Doors, Interior:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Face Specie: As indicated in the Drawing.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


3. Veneer Match: Book match, unless indicated otherwise. 4. Veneer Assembly on Door Face: Balanced Match, unless indicated

otherwise. 5. Room Match: Where required or indicated, provide door faces of compatible

color and grain within each separate room or area of building. 6. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible

species. 7. Core: Provide manufacturer’s standard core of either bonded wood block

stave or structural composite lumber. 8. Construction: Five-ply; stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied.

10.2.5 Doors for Opaque Finish

A. Solid-Core Doors, Interior:

1. Grade: Custom. 2. Faces: Medium-density overlay.

a. Apply medium-density overlay to standard-thickness closed-grain

hardwood face veneers.

3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. 4. Core: Provide manufacturer’s standard core of either bonded wood block

stave or structural composite lumber. 5. Construction: Five-ply; stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied.

10.2.6 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Doors

A. Solid-Core Door, Interior 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with

NEMA LD 3. b. Color, Pattern, and Finishes: As per Engineer’s approved sample from

plastic-laminate manufacturer’s full range.

3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Manufacturer’s standard hardwood edges for painting to match faces.

4. Core: Provide manufacturer’s standard core of either bonded wood block stave or structural composite lumber.

5. Construction: Five-ply; stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


10.2.7 Light Openings

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads as follows unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species or species compatible with door faces. 2. Profile: As per Engineer’s approved sample from the Manufacturer’s standard

range.

B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.

C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 1.2-mm- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; [factory primed for paint finish] [with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish]; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.

D. Factory-glaze doors complying with Section 25.0-Glass and Glazing, and of type indicated:

1. For Interior Doors: Single glazing. 2. For Fire-Rated Doors: Laminated glazing or insulated laminated glazing unit,

complying with fire-resistance rating indicated. 10.2.8 Door Frames

A. Solid Timber Frame: Hardwood with minimum density of not less than 540 kg/cu.

m. at 10 percent (± 2%) moisture content. Frames shall be manufactured with either mortise or tenon or tongued joints so as to be square and flat, back side to be painted with 2 coats of primer to BS 5358 or 4756. 1. Interior Fire-Rated Timber Door Frames: Provide frames, complete with

casings, fabricated from manufacturer’s standard solid fire-retardant-treated wood or from veneered fire-retardant particleboard, fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard, or mineral board.

B. Metal Frame (Where Required or Indicated): Knock down frames or Welded

Frames. Frames are constructed of minimum 1.5 mm (16 gauge) hot dip galvanized steel sheet ASTM A526, G90 for door thickness as indicated with the details confirming to the drawings. All bends shall be formed with true sharp radii.

10.2.9 Shop Priming


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Section 26, “Painting and Decorating”. Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer.

B. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 26, “Painting and Decorating. Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish.

10.2.10 Factory Finishing

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Finish doors at factory to the greatest extent possible. 1. Timber doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish shall be factory-

finished. Timber doors that are indicated to receive opaque finish may be field finished.

2. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

B. Field-Finished Doors: Field-finish doors in compliance with Section 26-Painting

and Decorating, of this Specification.


A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,

and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Do not begin installation until adjacent construction has been properly prepared. C. If adjacent construction preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify

Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

10.3.2 Preparation

A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

10.3.3 Installation


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


A. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions B. Install wood door hardware in accordance with door and hardware

manufacturer's instructions. Adjust hardware for proper door function and latching, and for smooth operation without excessive force or excessive clearance.

C. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames in accordance with the

requirements of the labeling agency and NFPA 80.

D. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 3mm at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.

Provide 3mm from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 6mm from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

F. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is

required at Project site.

10.3.4 Adjusting

A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

10.3.5 Protection

A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-18-11-1/9 STILE AND RAIL TIMBER DOORS

SECTION 18 CARPENTRY, JOINERY, & IRONMONGERY

PART 11 STILE AND RAIL TIMBER DOORS 11.1 GENERAL 11.1.1 Summary


1. Interior Stile and Rail Timber Doors 2. Fire-Rated Solid Timber Doors 3. Door Frames. 4. Door Glazing.


A. Section 18.0 - Rough Carpentry B. Section 18.0 – Architectural Woodwork

C. Section 25.0 - Glass and Glazing

D. Section 26.0 - Painting & Decorating


A. Where indicated or required, comply with the following requirements:

1. Fire-Resisting Door and Assemblies: Provide fire-resisting doors, shutters, grilles, screens, and panels, together with other related component assemblies testedd and labeled by an independent testing and inspecting agency or laboratory, confirming their fire–resistance rating.

a. Rating of all door components shall be equal to the rating of the door

assembly. b. All fire-resistance rated door shall be fitted with automatic door closers

that positively latch the door.

2. Fire-Resisting Door Enclosures: The space between a fire-resisting door assembly and the structural soffit above shall be closed by a wall or partition panel with fire-resistance rating equal to or exceeding that of the door.

11.1.4 Submittals


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


A. Product Data: For each type of door product indicated. Include the following:

1. Details of construction and glazing. 2. Factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each

kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings; and other pertinent data, including the following:

1. Dimensions of doors for factory fitting. 2. Locations and dimensions of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Requirements for veneer matching. 4. Doors to be factory finished, and finish requirements. 5. Fire ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.

D. Samples for Verification: Corner sections of doors, approximately 200 by 250

mm, with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of door, from Manufacturer.

F. Warranty: Sample of standard warranty to be issued upon completion of Project.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain solid timber doors from a single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where indicated or required, provide assemblies

conforming with relevant provisions of NFPA 80 “Standard for Doors and Other Opening Protectives”, when tested according to UL 10C “Positive Pressure Fire Test of Fire Door Assemblies”, and that are listed and labeled as such by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Notify Engineer prior to fabrication if fire doors required cannot qualify for labeling due to design, size, hardware or other requirement.

1. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Provide assemblies

complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labelled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated for vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 250 deg C above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

D. Safety Glass: Provide Category II materials complying with testing requirements

in relevant British Standards, and as follows:

1. Whether or not specified in the Drawing or other parts of the Contract Document, provide safety glazing where required or where risk of impact or falling glass is likely, as determined according to BS 6262 Part 4, “Glazing for Building Safety Related to Human Impact”.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another qualified certification agency acceptable to the Engineer and to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Where possible, engage suppliers and manufacturers of materials, products and

equipments specified for the Project from companies having an office and maintenance service based in Qatar.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Inspect for damage.

B. Storage and Protection: Comply with door manufacturer's written

recommendations and requirements.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom edge with numbering schedule used on approved Shop Drawing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

11.1.9 Warranty


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


A. Provide standard warranty, countersigned by Manufacturer and Installer, for repair or replacement of doors that fail in materials or workmanship within a specified warranty period.


a. Warping (bow, cup or twist). b. Exposure of core construction in face veneers. c. Delamination of face veneer.

2. Warranty shall include installation and finishing works that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Interior Doors: Not less than Five (5) years after the date of Substantial Completion.

4. Warranty Period for Insulated Glass Vision Panel: Not less than Ten (10) years after the date of Substantial Completion.

11.2 PRODUCTS 11.2.1 Manufacturers: Subject to the requirements of this Specification and other parts

of the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

11.2.2 Materials

A. Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other

requirements specified. 1. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites, including components, with wet-use

adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints.

2. Assemble interior doors, frames, and sidelites, including components, with either dry-use or wet-use adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and with ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger joints.

B. Unless indicated otherwise, provide doors made with adhesives and composite

wood products that do not contain urea-formaldehyde resins.

C. Panel Products: Provide any of the following, where indicated or required in the Project:

1. Particleboard made from wood particles, with binder containing no urea-

formaldehyde resin, and complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 2. Medium-density fiberboard made from wood fiber, with binder containing no

urea-formaldehyde resin, and complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 3. Hardboard, complying with AHA A135.4.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


4. Veneer core plywood, made with adhesive containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

11.2.3 Stile and Rail Timber Door, General

A. Panel Designs: As indicated in the Drawings. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect,

except with Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Engineer for review.

B. Size, layout and thickness shall be as specified in the Drawings.

11.2.4 Interior Stile and Rail Timber Door

A. Wood Species: As indicated in the Drawing.

B. Wood Cut for Transparent Finish: Unless indicated otherwise, stile and rail shall

be quarter-sawed and panels shall be plain-sawed.

C. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium 2. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear lumber; may be edge-glued for width.

Select lumber for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces.

3. Raised-Panel, Premium Construction: Edge-glued, clear lumber; select lumber for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces.

4. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered, wood-based panel product.

D. Door Construction for Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear lumber; may be edge-glued for width and

finger jointed. 3. Raised-Panel, Custom Construction: Veneered, wood-based panel product. 4. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered, wood-based panel product.

E. Stile and Rail Widths: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than the following: 1. Stiles, Top and Intermediate Rails: 119mm. 2. Bottom Rails: 244mm.

F. Raised-Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 30mm.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


G. Molding Profile: From the manufacturer’s fiull range as indicated in the approved

Shop Drawings.

H. Panel In-Lay (As Applicable): Provide in-lay materials on panel face as indicated: 1. Wood In-Lay: Provide solid wood inlay; of species, color and pattern indicated

in the Drawing. 2. Metal In-Lay: Provide Grade 316 stainless steel inlay; of size, finish, and

pattern indicated in the Drawing.

11.2.5 Fire-Rated Interior Stile and Rail Timber Door

A. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard fire-rated door complying with requirements indicated.

B. Wood Species: As indicated in the Drawing.

C. Wood Cut for Transparent Finish: Unless indicated otherwise, stile and rail shall be quarter-sawed and panels shall be plain-sawed.

D. Interior Fire-Rated Door Construction: Edged and veneered particleboard- or mineral-cored stiles and rails and raised panels.

E. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

F. Stile and Rail Widths: Manufacturer's standard for type of fire-rated door indicated, but not less than the following: 1. Stiles, Top and Intermediate Rails: 119mm. 2. Bottom Rails: 244mm.

G. Raised-Panel Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for type of fire-rated door indicated, but not less than 30mm.

H. Molding Profile: From the manufacturer’s fiull range as indicated in the approved Shop Drawings. Comply with specified molding profile requirements for fire-rated door.

11.2.6 Door Frames

A. Solid Timber Frame: Hardwood with minimum density of not less than 540 kg/cu. m. at 10 percent (± 2%) moisture content. Frames shall be manufactured with


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


either mortise or tenon or tongued joints so as to be square and flat, back side to be painted with 2 coats of primer to BS 5358 or 4756. 1. Interior Fire-Rated Timber Door Frames: Where indicated or required, provide

frames, complete with casings, fabricated from manufacturer’s standard solid fire-retardant-treated wood or from veneered fire-retardant particleboard, fire-retardant medium-density fiberboard, or mineral board.

11.2.7 Glazed Openings

A. Factory-glaze doors complying with Section 25.0-Glass and Glazing, and of type

indicated: 1. For Interior Doors: Single glazing. 2. For Fire-Rated Doors: Laminated glazing or insulated laminated glazing unit,

complying with fire-resistance rating indicated.

B. Glazed Opening Frames: 1. Provide flush wood glass stops to be same species as door panel or veneer

face for transparent doors and mill-option hardwood for opaque doors. a. For Fire-Rated Door: Provide manufacturer’s standard solid wood or

metal frames tested and certified for fire-rated construction required, and primed for field painting or wrapped with veneer to match door face.

11.2.8 Shop Priming

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer

specified in Section 26, “Painting and Decorating”. Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer.

B. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 26, “Painting and Decorating. Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish.

11.2.9 Finishing

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Finish doors at factory to the greatest extent possible. 1. Timber doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish shall be factory-

finished. Timber doors that are indicated to receive opaque finish may be field finished.

2. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


B. Field-Finished Doors: Field-finish doors in compliance with Section 26-Painting

and Decorating, of this Specification.


A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size,

location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Do not begin installation until adjacent construction has been properly prepared. C. If adjacent construction preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify

Engineer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

11.3.2 Preparation

A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

11.3.3 Installation

A. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions B. Install wood door hardware in accordance with door and hardware

manufacturer's instructions. Adjust hardware for proper door function and latching, and for smooth operation without excessive force or excessive clearance.

C. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames in accordance with the

requirements of the labeling agency and NFPA 80.

D. Field-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 3mm at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.

Provide 3mm from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 6mm from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


b. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

E. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

F. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is

required at Project site.

11.3.4 Adjusting

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

11.3.5 Protection

A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF PART


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18

AEB-782-09-REV.00 S-18-12-1/13 IRONMONGERY

SECTION 18 CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY PART 12 IRONMONGERY 12.1 GENERAL

12.1.1 Summary

A. This Part includes materials, equipment, services and all operations necessary

for the complete supply and installation of all hardware as shown on the drawings, as specified and/or or inferable herein, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including the following:

1. Hardware for Swing Doors. 2. Hardware for Sliding Doors. 3. Electrified Door Hardware. 4. Cylinder for Door Hardware specified in other Parts of this Specification.


A. Coordinate the application of hardware items with door and frame details and

with methods of fastenings.

B. Templates: Make door hardware to templates, with wood and/or machine screws as applicable to door and frame details. Furnish templates and schedules to door and frame manufacturers and other trades requiring same, so that doors and frames can be cut, reinforced and prepared in the shop to receive the hardware.

C. Single source: Where several manufacturers are specified for one type of

hardware, use only the products of one manufacturer. D. No names, designs or labels will be permitted on the following items: Face of

cylinders, turn pieces or operating trim of locksets or latch sets, push bar, pull handles, plates, case covers of surface applied closing devices and underside of door holder arms.

12.1.3 Submittals

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and including the details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


2. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door hardware.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic protective trim units in each finish, color,

and texture required for each type of trim unit indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type required, in each finish specified, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Tag Samples with full description for coordination with the door hardware schedule. Submit Samples before, or concurrent with, submission of door hardware schedule.

1. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 50mm by 100mm Samples for sheet

and 100mm long Samples for other products. a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable

and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.

E. Other Action Submittals:

1. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer,

detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with

submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

b. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format as in the Contract Documents.

c. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of

each door and frame. 2) Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings

on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. 3) Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,

function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

4) Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems.

5) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in

schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


8) List of related door devices specified in other Parts of this Specification for each door and frame. .

F. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.

G. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.

H. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, from the manufacturer. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled

fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

I. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule.

J. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Part.


A. Unless accepted otherwise by the Engineer, Manufacturer/Fabricator of products in this Part shall be ISO 9001-2000 certified, or higher.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware installation similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Installer shall employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available

during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Engineer, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

3. Engineering Responsibility: For electrified door hardware; preparation of data including Shop Drawings.

C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from a single manufacturer. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified door hardware from same

manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where indicated or required, provide assemblies conforming with relevant provisions of NFPA 80 “Standard for Doors and Other Opening Protectives”, when tested according to UL 10C “Positive Pressure Fire Test of Fire Door Assemblies”, and that are listed and labeled as such by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Notify Engineer prior to fabrication if fire doors required cannot qualify for labeling due to design, size, hardware or other requirement.

F. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 3 cu. m per minute/sq. m at the

tested pressure differential of 75 Pa of water.

G. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 67N to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

I. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in for electrified door hardware. 4. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware

delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Store all hardware items in a dry, secure area, in a manner to facilitate sorting, checking and unpacking.

D. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.



VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


A. As the climate at the project site is particularly corrosive due to its proximity to the ocean, the resulting saline atmosphere, the high average temperature, and the intense solar radiation, the Contractor shall make all provisions necessary to propose, subject to prior approval by the Engineer, and if approved, to install non-corroding products and materials including suitable grade aluminum and stainless steel and plastics for materials exposed to the exterior environment. Where specifically indicated or where no alternative to steel or other oxidizing metal is possible, such materials shall be protected against corrosion by protective coating, galvanization, or by other method necessary and guaranteed for not less than 15 years.

12.1.7 Coordination

A. Co-ordinate hardware schedule with door manufacturer’s door schedule. The hardware items shall be checked jointly by the main contractor and hardware supplier to avoid any discrepancies.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete.

C. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

D. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

E. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.

12.1.8 Warranty

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond

normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Not less than Three (3) years from date of Substantial

Completion, unless otherwise


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


a. For Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: Not less than Five (5) years from date of Substantial.

b. Exit Devices: Not less than Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.

c. Manual Closers: Not less than Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

d. Concealed Floor Closers: Not less than Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

12.1.9 Maintenance Service A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools

and maintenance instructions for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide Six (6) months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door and door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

12.2 PRODUCTS

12.2.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with this Specification and other parts of

the Contract Documents, refer to Section 30.0-Schedule of Preferred Manufacturers.

12.2.2 Scheduled Door Hardware

A. Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings and in

compliance with requirements in this Part. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide products complying with referenced BHMA

designations, in quantity, item, size, finish or color, and named manufacturers' products indicated. a. Proprietary product mentioned herein is for the purpose of establishing

minimum quality standards. Products from other manufacturers having similar system and material component, having equal or better physical and technical quality standards than those specified, and conforming to the design requirements, may be proposed by the Contractor, subject to review and approval by the Engineer in writing.

2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence

of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and

other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware shall be as indicated in the Drawing. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


a. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation

are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements..

12.2.3 Hinges

A. Hinges: To BHMA A156.1; provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed

on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.

B. Use ball bearing hinges only. All hinges to be used on exterior doors shall be of stainless steel to match the architectural hardware.

C. Quantity: Provide the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 1524 mm. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 1550 through 2280 mm. 3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights over 2280 through 3050 mm. 4. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 1524 mm.

D. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges.

E. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: To BHMA A156.17.

F. Center-Hung and Offset Pivots: To BHMA A156.4.

G. Continuous Hinges: To BHMA A156.26; minimum 3mm thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 102 mm; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete.

H. Continuous Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings.

12.2.4 Mechanical Locks and Latches

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Bored Locks: Bored Locks: To BHMA A156.2.

C. Mortise Locks: To BHMA A156.13.

D. Interconnected Locks: To BHMA A156.12


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 13mm latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 13mm latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 20mm bolt throw.

F. Lock Backset: 70 mm, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Shapes and Construction: For Strike Plates, Forends, Escutcheons, Bolts, Lever and Knob Handles and other parts of the lockset shall be as per manufacturer’s standard and complying with type of application indicated.

H. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

12.2.5 Auxiliary Locks: For Bored, Mortise and Narrow Stile Auxiliary Locks: To BHMA A156.5: with strike that suits frame.

12.2.6 Electric Strikes: To BHMA A156.31; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.

12.2.7 Electromagnetic Locks (Where Required)

A. Electromagnetic Locks: To BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; full-exterior or full-interior type, as required by application indicated.

B. Delayed-Egress Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.24, electrically powered, with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; depressing push bar for more than 3 seconds initiates irreversible alarm and 15-second delay for egress. When integrated with fire alarm, fire alarm voids 15-second delay.

12.2.8 Electromechanical Locks (Where Required)

A. Electromechanical Locks: To BHMA A156.25; motor or solenoid driven; mortise deadlocking latchbolt; with strike that suits frame.

12.2.9 Surface Bolts: To BHMA A156.16.

12.2.10 Manual Flush Bolts: For inactive leaf of double-leaf doors; To BHMA A156.16; minimum 19mm throw; designed for mortising into door edge.

12.2.11 Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: To BHMA A156.3.

12.2.12 Lock Cylinders

A. Lock Cylinders: Heavy-duty, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


1. Shall be of same manufacturer as for locking devices.

B. Standard Lock Cylinders: To BHMA A156.5; face finished to match lockset.

C. High-Security Lock Cylinders: To BHMA A156.30; Type M, mechanical or E, electrical; permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset.

12.2.13 Door Closers

A. General: Shall be of the type indicated in the Hardware Schedule. Unless specified, finish to match door lockset/handle. 1. Surface Closers: To BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with

adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

2. Concealed Closers: To BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

12.2.14 Door Stop and Holder Devices

A. Mechanical Stops and Holder: For wall- and floor-mounted stops: To BHMA

A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal.

B. Closer Holder Release Devices: To BHMA A156.15; closer connected with separate or integral releasing and fire- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on interruption of signal to release device. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system or loss of power.

C. Electromagnetic Stops and Holder: To BHMA A156.15, wall- or floor-mounted, single- or double-unit with strike plate attached to swinging door; coordinated with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system for labeled fire-rated door assemblies.

D. Overhead Stops and Holders: To BHMA A156.8.

12.2.15 Door Gasketing: To BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.000774 cu. m/s per m of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

12.2.16 Sliding Door Hardware: To BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


12.2.17 Threshold: To BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.

12.2.18 Door Protection Units (Where Indicated)

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: To BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 1.3mm thick

aluminum, brass, bronze, or stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.

B. Plastic Protection Plates: To BHMA A156.6; fabricated with four sides beveled, and of one of the following: 1. Plastic Laminate: 3mm thick; to NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS 2. Rigid Plastic: 1.5mm thick, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic 3. Acrylic: 3mm thick

12.2.19 Miscellaneous Hardwares

A. Hat and coat hooks shall be aesthetically pleasing. Where vulnerable to abuse, use heavy duty hook independently certified as withstanding not less than 1000N applied load without deformation with the fixing supplied.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, ironmongery to cabinets, fittings, fixture, etc., shall suit the location and function and match door ironmongery in quality, design, and finish.

C. Flush pulls and drawer pull shall be approved, suitably sized units from the same range as the door hardware.

D. Drawer slides shall be heavy duty rust-proofed enamelled steel unit, with nylon cages and steel bearings able to bear the required load at full extension.

E. Key Control Cabinet: To BHMA A156.5; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks.

12.2.20 Fabrication

A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.

B. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


12.2.21 Finishes

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware

schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.


pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

12.3 EXECUTION

12.3.1 Examination

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of

wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

12.3.2 Installation

A. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce

attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage

fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. B. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but

not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 750 mm of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


C. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 750 mm of door height greater than 2286 mm.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during

construction period. E. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key

control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. F. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, in

equipment room. Verify location with Engineer. G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed

of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 24 "Joint Sealants", of this Specification.

H. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated

in door hardware schedule. Do not mount fSloor stops where they will impede traffic.

I. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and

frame. J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is

closed.

12.3.3 Mounting Heights

A. Unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, door hardware shall be mounted the following distances measured to the center of the hardware: 1. Top Hinge: 250mm from head of door to top of hinge. 2. Bottom Hinge: 256mm from finished floor to bottom of hinge. 3. Intermediate Hinge: Centered between top and bottom hinge. 4. Lockset, Latches: 1000mm from finish floor level. 5. Deadlocks: 1450mm from finish floor level. 6. Mortise Night Latches: 1450mm from finish floor level. 7. Panic Device Crossbar: 1000mm from finish floor level. 8. Door Pulls: 1100mm from finish floor level. 9. Pull/Push Handles: 1450mm from finish floor level.


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.


VOLUME 2 SECTION 18


1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware

and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

12.3.5 Adjusting

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and

each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements

and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to

close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 3. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly

engage lock bolt.

12.3.6 Cleaning and Protection

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is

without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

12.3.7 Demonstration

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.

END OF PART

Report 1

Documents

Transcript of Report 1